Only this pageAll pages
Powered by GitBook
Couldn't generate the PDF for 151 pages, generation stopped at 100.
Extend with 50 more pages.
1 of 100

Downloads, Compliance, & Marketing Materials

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Installation

Installing DynaFlex II products is straightforward: The manufacturer or acquirer configures the preferred settings, keys, terminal, and payment brand settings before deployment; end users need only set up a host with appropriate software, configure the software, and connect the device to the host. This section provides general information about inspecting, connecting, and installing DynaFlex II products.

About Host Software

In any solution, DynaFlex II products are connected to a host, which must have software installed that can communicate with the device, and which is capable of processing transactions. To set up the host to work with DynaFlex II products, follow the installation and configuration instructions provided by the vendor of the host or the host software. For information about developing custom host software, see Developing Custom Software.

Connecting to a Host

About Connecting to a Host

The following sections provide information on how to connect DynaFlex II products to a host via USB.

How to Connect DynaFlex II Products to a Host or Charger via USB

Figure 3-1 - Connecting to a USB Host or USB Charger. Left: Countertop Models. Right: Kiosk Models

To connect DynaFlex II products to a USB host or charger using the USB-C port, follow these steps (for reference see Figure 3-1 and About DynaFlex II Components):

  1. For best results, use the cable that is included with the device or another cable from Table 1-2 – DynaFlex II Accessories on page 7. These cables are designed specifically for DynaFlex II products and include ferrite shielding at both ends of the cable to reduce emissions and interference. If the solution design requires an alternate cable, contact MagTek for assistance with ferrite selection and placement, and with connector overmold design.

  2. Connect the USB-C end of the cable to DynaFlex II or DynaFlex II PED.

  3. If you plan to route the cable out the back of the device, route the cable through the cable management clip to change its direction. Even if you are not routing out the back, you may use the cable clip for strain relief, to help stabilize the mechanical connection when cardholders or operators move the device or the cable.

  4. Route the cable in the desired direction (e.g., out the back, left, right, down into the countertop, or into the mounting compartment of a kiosk).

  5. Connect the other end of the USB cable to the charger or to the host’s USB port.

  6. As soon as the device starts receiving power through USB, it automatically powers on.

  7. If the specific device serial number you are connecting has not been connected to the host before, the device shows Welcome on the display, and the Windows system tray on the host reports it is Setting up a device (see Figure 3-2 - Setting Up a Device), When installation is complete (approximately 30 seconds later depending on the host), Windows reports Device is ready,(see Figure 3-3 - Device is Ready) and the device shows in Windows Device Manager under Human Interface Devices as two devices HID-compliant vendor-defined device with VID 0801 and PID 2020 and USB Input Device.

Figure 3-2 - Setting Up a Device

Figure 3-3 - Device is Ready

  1. After successfully connecting to the host operating system via USB, devices with a touchscreen display a Welcome screen or a customizable graphic.

  2. The operating system may put the device into USB Suspend mode. See section 4.6.6 About USB Suspend.

The DynaFlex II product line offers versatile mounting solutions, including:

  • Integrated Slip-Resistant Adhesive Strips: The underside of the device features three adhesive mounting strips (see Figure 3-4) that provide secure attachment to any clean, non-porous surface. These strips come with a protective film that must be removed before installing onto a surface.

Figure 3-4 - Adhesive Mounting Strip and Protective Film

  • Lanyard Mount Point: The integrated mount point allows the device to be hung or carried, making it easy to store and handle, particularly in grab-and-go payment environments (see Figure 3-5).

Figure 3-5 - Lanyard Mount Point

  • Charging Station Compatibility (Non-Kiosk Models): Non-kiosk versions of the device can be placed in an optional charging station. This station can be used in conjunction with the lanyard mount point for quick access and easy drop-in charging between handheld uses.

Figure 3-6 - Charging Station Compatibility

  • Custom Mounting Options: DynaFlex II devices can be attached to custom mounting brackets or housed within an enclosure, enabling integration into larger system designs.

  1. Verify that the protective film has been removed from the adhesive mounting strips located on the underside of the device (see Figure 3-4).

  2. Mount DynaFlex II devices onto a smooth, flat, and non-porous surface by pressing the device firmly using the adhesive mounting strips (see Figure 3-7).

Figure 3-7 - Mounting DynaFlex onto a Nonporous Surface

  1. Do not mount the device on rough, dirty, or uneven surfaces.

  2. To uninstall the device, twist it to disengage the mounting feet from the mounting surface.

For instructions on using the optional charging station, refer to How to Mount the Charging Station.

If your installation requires custom mounting brackets, contact your MagTek representative for design advice and assistance from MagTek’s Engineering team.

This section provides information and guidelines for designing the mechanical aspects of a solution that incorporates DynaFlex II Kiosk models. MagTek strongly recommends vetting and testing solution designs before finalizing and deploying them to make sure the design meets all requirements (e.g., functional, legal, security, certification, safety, and so on).

When designing the mechanical portions of a solution that incorporates DynaFlex II Kiosk models, consider the following:

  • Review About DynaFlex II Components for an overall introduction to the device’s physical features and what they are called.

  • Review Appendix A Technical Specifications.

  • Review the information below about overall device dimensions and mounting hole locations and use.

  • Determine device orientation. The device supports all four orientations.

Overall dimensions of the device are shown in Figure 3-8 and Figure 3-9. On request, MagTek can provide a 3D model of the device’s envelope to assist with the mechanical portion of solution design. MagTek strongly recommends building and testing prototypes with actual devices before finalizing the solution design.

Figure 3-8 – DynaFlex II Kiosk Models Overall Dimensions

The screw hole placement on the bottom of DynaFlex II Kiosk models is detailed in Figure 3-9. The holes are designed to accommodate screw size M4 x 0.7mm and a maximum screw depth of 0.315 inches (8mm). The recommended torque range for installing the screws is 20 to 22 in-lbs. (2.3 to 2.5 N-m).

Figure 3-9 – DynaFlex II Kiosk Models Mounting Hole Locations

When designing an enclosure or mounting bracket, make sure there is adequate clearance for cardholders to swipe, insert, and tap. If the solution design includes metal objects anywhere near the device, including metal enclosures, ensure that at all points the metal is no further forward than 15mm below the top face of the device. Proximity to metal can adversely affect the device’s performance.

Figure 3-10 - Unobstructed View of Card Insertion Slot, Swipe Path and Contactless Landing Zone

As a security measure, the device must be installed such that cardholders have a full, unobstructed view of the housing around the card insertion slot opening (“entry zone”) and MSR swipe path prior to insertion or swipe (see Figure 3-10). This is to allow cardholders to easily detect suspicious objects in or around the swipe path and card slot entry, such as bugs / skimmers / tapping mechanisms, and their wires or antennas. Be sure to select an installation height and mounting angle that meet this requirement.

To mount the optional charging station to a countertop using the four adhesive mounting strips on the underside of the charging station (see Figure 3-12), follow these steps:

  1. Determine where the charging station will be placed.

  2. Remove the adhesive strip protective film, ensure the mounting surface is a clean, smooth, and flat surface. It is important to avoid rough, dirty, or uneven surfaces.

  3. Consider the cable length, cardholder and operator ergonomics, and access for cleaning, maintenance, and repair.

  4. If the charging station will be used for charging in handheld operations, unobstructed connection and disconnection of the device from the charging station is also a consideration.

Figure 3-11 - Charging Station Dimensions

Figure 3-12 - Charging Station Mounting Surfaces and Screw Holes

To mount the charging station to a countertop, table, or flat surface using the screw holes on the underside of the charging station (see Figure 3-12), follow these steps:

  1. Determine where the charging station will be installed.

    1. Mark the location of the screw holes by placing the device over the area where it is to be installed (see Figure 3-13).

    2. Once the appropriate measurements have been taken and marked, drill the screw holes into the installation surface. Using (2) M4 x 0.7mm thread pitch (not included) screws, screw up through the drilled holes in the mounting surface, see Figure 3-14.

  2. Connect the charging station to a USB port or to a USB charger with a minimum of 1A current capability. For the best results, use the cable that is included with the device. It includes shielding at both ends of the cable to reduce interference.

Figure 3-13 – Preparing a Flat Surface for Mounting the Charging Station

Figure 3-14 - Screw Installation

Figure 3-15 – Connecting DynaFlex II to the Optional Charging Station

Review any additional requirements from other agencies, such as PCI and EMV solution certification requirements, safety ordinances, and so on, which may introduce additional constraints to the design.

Connect the charging station to a USB port or to a USB charger with a minimum of 1A current capability. For the best results, use the cable that is included with the device. It includes shielding at both ends of the cable to reduce interference.

  • To uninstall, twist the charging station to disengage the adhesive mounting strips from any surface.

  • To uninstall, remove the screws from the underside of the charging station.

  • Mounting

    About Mounting

    How to mount DynaFlex II

    How to Mount DynaFlex II Kiosk Models

    CAUTION: This document describes how to use DynaFlex II Kiosk models securely. Using the device in any way other than the approved methods described in this document invalidates the PCI PTS POI approval of the device.

    Not following the guidelines in this section could damage the device, render it inoperable, and/or violate the conditions of the warranty.

    How to Mount the Charging Station

    Note: The adhesive mounting strips used to mount the charging station to a surface may become less effective if dust and or debris accumulate on them. If this occurs, wipe them down with a damp cloth to restore their adhesive properties.

    User Interface

    This section contains information on DynaFlex II Go's LEDs, beeper, and BCR status LED. It is important to note that DynaFlex II Go devices are equipped with an optional rechargeable battery. If there is no power supply to the device through the USB cable or optional internal rechargeable battery, all LEDs, along with the BCR status LED, will not illuminate. When this occurs, the user interface will resemble the device as shown in Figure 7-1.

    As mentioned in section 1.1 Key Features and Components, DynaFlex II Go models equipped with a barcode reader (BCR) have a similar physical appearance as models without a BCR, as shown in Figure 7-1. BCR models are equipped with a camera and a QR code located on the front side of the device.

    • DynaFlex II Go devices have a user interface composed of three elements: a visual indicator consisting of four LEDs, a beeper that produces audible alerts, and a power button see Figure 6-1 - Power Button.

    • DynaFlex II Go BCR devices have a user interface composed of four elements: a visual indicator consisting of four LEDs, a barcode reader status LED, a beeper that produces audible alerts, and a power button see Figure 6-1 - Power Button.

    • DynaFlex II Go devices do not feature input components such as touch screens.

    Figure – DynaFlex II Go and DynaFlex II Go BCR

    Appendix C - Optional Accessories

    Tailored for use with mobile handsets, tablets, and desktop computers, DynaFlex II Go offers a variety of accessories designed to meet a wide range of operational needs.

    The Countertop Stand is well-suited for countertop placement or battery charging, providing a convenient and secure means of positioning the device.

    Users can take advantage of the OtterBox® uniVERSE® adaptor for easy sliding and connection to a wide range of mobile devices, including phones and tablets.

    DynaFlex II Go offers the option to install a half-rubber sleeve, intended to boost the device's ingress protection when utilizing the OtterBox® uniVERSE® adaptor for DynaFlex II Go.

    21078408 DYNAFLEX II GO, KIT COUNTERTOP STAND

    21078409 - DYNAFLEX II GO ADAPTOR FOR OTTERBOX

    21078410 - DYNAFLEX II GO RUBBER SLEEVE

    21078411 - DYNAFLEX II GO RUBBER SLEEVE HALF SIZE

    Configuration

    The device does not have an on-screen configuration interface. However, it does have settings the host can change using commands. These settings are documented as in .

    Properties
    DynaProx Programmer’s Manual

    Installation

    Installing DynaFlex II Go products is straightforward: The manufacturer or acquirer, configures the preferred settings, keys, terminal, and payment brand settings before deployment; end users need only set up a host with appropriate software, configure the software, and connect the device to the host. This section provides general information about inspecting, connecting, and installing DynaFlex II Go products.

    About Inspection

    Before unpacking the device, it is important to inspect its secure packaging to make sure it has not been tampered with in storage or in transit. MagTek provides details for inspecting the integrity of the device’s secure packaging in D998200594 DynaFlex II Go Package Inspection Document.

    It is important to thoroughly inspect a new device before deployment, and regularly inspect devices in live usage (including its immediate surroundings) to make sure malicious individuals have not tampered with it. MagTek recommends conducting inspection training for all device operators, and an inspection schedule with checkpoints in place to make sure operators are performing inspections as specified and as scheduled. MagTek provides an easy-to-follow device inspection reference D998200593 DynaFlex II Go Device Inspection Document.

    About Host Software

    DynaFlex II Go products do not have a display. In any solution, DynaFlex II Go must be connected to a host, which must have software installed that can communicate with the device and is capable of processing transactions. To set up the host to work with DynaFlex II Go, follow the installation and configuration instructions provided by the vendor of the host or the host software. For information about developing custom host software, see section 9 Developing Custom Software.

    Connecting DynaFlex II Go to a Host

    The following sections describe how to connect DynaFlex II Go to a host using the available USB-C receptacle or Bluetooth® Low Energy (LE) connections.

    Figure - Connecting to a Host via USB-C

    To connect DynaFlex II Go products to a USB host computer or charger using the USB-C port, follow these steps (for reference see Figure 4-1):For best results, use the cable that is included with the device or another cable from Table 1-2 - DynaFlex II Go Accessories on page 9. Connect the USB-C end of the cable to DynaFlex II Go see Figure 4-1 - Connecting to a Host via USB-C.

    • Connect the other end of the USB cable to the host’s USB port.

    • As soon as the device starts receiving power through USB, it automatically powers on.

    • If the specific device serial number you are connecting has not been previously connected to the host, the Windows system tray on the host reports it is setting up a device.

    • When installation is complete, Windows reports Device is ready , (see Figure 4-2 – Setup Complete) and the device shows in Windows Device Manager under Human Interface Devices (see Figure 4-3 – Windows Device Manager) as two devices: HID-compliant vendor-defined device (see Figure 4-4 – HID Compliant Vendor-defined Device Properties) with VID 0801 and PID 2024 and USB Input Device ..

    Figure – Setup Complete

    Figure – Windows Device Manager

    Figure – HID Compliant Vendor-defined Device Properties

    • The operating system may put the device into USB Suspend mode.

    To connect DynaFlex II Go via Bluetooth® LE to an iOS device, refer to section 9 Developing Custom Software and D998200386 MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices Programmer's Manual ( iOS ).

    1.1.2 How to Connect DynaFlex II Go to an Android Host via Bluetooth® Low Energy (LE)

    To connect DynaFlex II Go to an Android host that supports Bluetooth® Low Energy (LE):

    • If any Bluetooth® Low Energy (LE) host software has an active data connection to the device, close the connection.

    • On the Android host, install and configure the host software you intend to use with DynaFlex II Go. If you do not yet have that software, you can download a test tool from the Google Play store called MTUSDK Demo , published by MagTek, Inc. .

    • Make sure the DynaFlex II Go output connection is configured to transmit card data over Bluetooth® LE. This is the factory default.

    • Press and hold the Power Button for 4 beeps until LED 4 starts flashing indicating Bluetooth®. Pairing is in process. The Bluetooth® Status LED flashes once per second for up to three minutes, or until a host pairs or connects.

    To unpair from the device, follow these steps:

    • Locate the device in the Bluetooth configuration page.

    • Press the settings (gear) icon.

    • Press the Forget button and make sure the device disappears from the disappears from the Paired Devices list.

    To connect DynaFlex II Go to a host with Windows 10 version 1703 or above, and Bluetooth® 4.0 or higher hardware that supports Bluetooth® Low Energy (LE), follow these steps:

    • Make sure the host’s Bluetooth® LE interface is turned on and working correctly.

    • If any Bluetooth® Low Energy LE host software has an active data connection to the device, close the connection.

    • On the host, install and configure the software you intend to use with DynaFlex II Go (if you do not yet have that software, you can use 1000007351 MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices (Windows) available from MagTek.com, to perform simple tests):

    DynaFlex II Go products are designed to provide flexible mounting options:

    • The device can be mounted to the host via external clip or embedded lanyard.

    This section provides information and guidelines for designing the mechanical aspects of a solution that incorporates DynaFlex II Go products. MagTek strongly recommends vetting and testing solution designs before finalizing and deploying them, to make sure the design meets all requirements (e.g., functional, legal, security, certification, safety, and so on).

    When designing the mechanical portions of a solution that incorporates DynaFlex II Go products, consider the following:

    • Review section 1.1 Key Features and Components for an overall introduction to the device’s physical features and what they are called.

    • Review Appendix A Technical Specifications.

    • Review the information below about overall device dimensions and mounting hole locations and use.

    • Review any additional requirements from other agencies, such as PCI and EMV solution certification requirements, safety ordinances, and so on, which may introduce additional constraints to the design.

    Overall dimensions of the device are shown in the below Figure. On request, MagTek can provide a 3D model of the device’s envelope to assist with the mechanical portion of solution design. MagTek strongly recommends building and testing prototypes with actual devices before finalizing the solution design.

    Figure 4-5 - DynaFlex II Go Overall Dimensions

    When designing an enclosure or mounting bracket, make sure there is adequate clearance for cardholders to tap or users to present a bar code. Proximity to metal can reduce the device’s reading range.

    USB Enumeration

    When DynaFlex II Go is connected via USB in an idle state, it can be detected by a host through the USB HID port see Figure 7-6. After the host has connected to DynaFlex II Go, LED 1 will stay on. The device is in Ready State.

    Figure - LED Status (Idle State) Before Host Detection and LED Status (USB Ready State) After Connecting to Host

  • On the Android host, launch the Settings application and open the Bluetooth menu.

  • Press the SEARCH FOR DEVICES or Scan button to show an AVAILABLE Bluetooth Devices list.

  • Locate the seven-digit serial number on the label on the bottom of the device.

  • Device will appear in the list as

  • When the host pops up a DG II Go-xxxxxx where xxxxxx matches the serial number. message asking for a code, enter the configured passkey (or the default 000000) to return to the Bluetooth configuration page. The device appears in the PAIRED DEVICES list.

  • Use the host software or the MagTek Test app to test swiping a card.

  • Remember to change the default password. See 1000007352 MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices (Android).

  • Make sure the host software is configured to look for the device on the proper connection type.
  • Make sure the host software knows which device(s) it should interface with.

  • Make sure the host software is configured to properly interpret incoming data from the device. When using Bluetooth® LE, the device transmits data in GATT format.

  • Make sure the DynaFlex II Go output connection is configured to transmit card data over Bluetooth® LE. This is the factory default.

  • In the Start menu type Bluetooth and select Bluetooth and other device settings, or double-click the Bluetooth Devices icon in the taskbar to launch the Bluetooth® & other devices settings window.

  • Locate the seven-digit serial number on the label on the bottom of the device.

  • Press and hold the Power Button for 4 beeps until LED 4 starts flashing indicating Bluetooth® Pairing is in process. The Bluetooth® Status LED flashes once per second for up to three minutes, or until a host pairs or connects.

  • Press the Add Bluetooth or other device button to launch an Add a device window.

  • Under Choose the kind of device you want to add , select Bluetooth.

  • Locate the device called DF II Go-xxxxxxx , where xxxxxxx matches the device’s serial number. Enter the configured passkey (or the default 999999) and press the Connect button.

  • After a short period of time, the text Connected appears below the device you are pairing with. Note that in this case, “Connected” means the device is paired, but the host does not have an active data connection until the host software initiates one.

  • Press the Done button to close the Add a Device window.

  • Use the host software to test swiping a card.

  • Remember to change the default password. See the DynaFlex II Go Programmer’s Reference documents for detail to unpair the device:

    • Select the device in the Bluetoth and other device settings window.

    • Press the Remove device button.

  • How to Connect DynaFlex II Go to a Host Computer via USB-C

    How to Connect DynaFlex II Go to an iOS Host via Bluetooth® Low Energy (LE)

    How to Connect DynaFlex II Go to a Windows 10 Host [Version 1703 or Above] via Bluetooth® Low Energy (LE) (Windows Drivers)

    Mounting

    About Mounting

    How to Mount DynaFlex II Go

    This document describes how to use DynaFlex II Go securely. Using the device in any way other than the approved methods described in this document invalidates the PCI PTS approval of the device.

    Not following the guidelines in this section could damage the device, render it inoperable, and/or violate the conditions of the warranty.

    Appendix A References

    The following documents may be used to provide additional details about the device and this security policy:

    • DynaFlex II Go Installation and Operation Manual

    • DynaFlex II Go Programmer’s Manual (COMMANDS)

    • DynaFlex II Go Device Inspection Document

    • DynaFlex II Go Package Inspection Document

    • NIST SP 800-57-1 Recommendation for Key Management

    • ANS X9.24 Part 3:2017, Retail Financial Services Symmetric Key Management, Part 3: Derived Unique Key Per Transaction Using Symmetric Techniques

    • X9 TR-31:2010, Interoperable Secure Key Exchange Key Block Specification for Symmetric Algorithms

    Installation and User Guidance

    Initial Inspection

    After receiving the device, the customer should visually inspect the product as follows:

    • Inspect the label found on the back of the device (see section 2.3.1 Hardware Identification) and make sure the label is not missing, obscured, or modified.

    • Check the PCI Hardware Identifier on the device label and make sure it matches the Hardware # listed for the device on the PCI website for Approved Devices. Go to the PCI compliance web page and search for MagTek, and find the product name, iDynamo 5 Gen III. Compare the Hardware ID and Firmware ID: https://www.pcisecuritystandards.org/assessors_and_solutions/pin_transaction_devices

    Note: Firmware ID is accessible by connecting iDynamo 5 Gen III to a host device via USB-C, using the latest software provided by MagTek (see Firmware Identification).

    • Check the Device serial number (SN) and make sure it matches with labels on shipping materials and documentation.

    • Visually inspect the device, per [2], which is included in the package with each device. See section 4.1 Periodic Inspection for more information regarding visual inspection of the device.

    • Follow the steps in Firmware Identification to view the PCI firmware versions installed on the device. Make sure this matches one of the Firmware # values listed on the PCI web site for iDynamo 5 Gen III.

    Connect the device to a host via USB-C for control and power. iDynamo 5 Gen III products are designed to provide flexible mounting options such as:

    • External clip

    • Embedded lanyard

    See the device installation and operation manual for more information on how to handle and operate the device, [1].

    The specified environmental conditions to operate and store the device are:

    • Operating temperature range: 32°F to 95°F (0°C to 35°C) 5-90% RH with no condensation.

    • Storage temperature range: -4°F to 113°F (-20°C to 45°C) 10-90% RH with no condensation.

    • Power Supply: DC 5.0 V/1.0A

    Any temperature or operating voltage outside the values listed above will trigger environmental security protections, resulting in a tamper condition. The device will need to be returned to the factory for inspection before this condition can be cleared.

    iDynamo 5 Gen III products support a USB-C interface using the USB-HID protocol. Transactions, configuration, firmware updates, and key injection can all be performed using this interface type. Use of any method not listed in this security policy will invalidate the device’s PCI PTS approval.

    iDynamo 5 Gen III products ship from the factory fully secure. The devices have no configuration settings that require modification by the user to meet PCI security requirements.

    Sensor

    Low Threshold Value

    High Threshold Value

    Internal Voltage

    2.2V ± 0.1V

    4.2V ± 0.2V

    Temperature

    -48°C to -27°C

    Note that in PCI listings, lowercase “x” is a wildcard meaning ‘any single character.’

    Installation

    Environmental Conditions

    Communications and Security Protocols

    Configuration Settings

    95°C to 105°C

    Secure Card Reader Security Policy

    Document Number: D998200619-108

    REGISTERED TO ISO 9001:2015

    MagTek® is a registered trademark of MagTek, Inc.

    MagnePrint® is a registered trademark of MagTek, Inc.

    MagneSafe® is a registered trademark of MagTek, Inc.

    Magensa™ is a trademark of MagTek, Inc. iDynamo™ is a trademark of MagTek, Inc.

    ANSI®, the ANSI logo, and numerous other identifiers containing "ANSI" are registered trademarks, service marks, and accreditation marks of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

    ISO® is a registered trademark of the International Organization for Standardization.

    UL™ and the UL logo are trademarks of UL LLC.

    PCI Security Standards Council® is a registered trademark of the PCI Security Standards Council, LLC.

    Apple Pay®, Apple Wallet®, iPhone®, iPod®, Mac®, and OS X® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. iPad™ is a trademark of Apple. Inc. App StoreSM is a service mark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Apple and MFi are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used by Apple Inc. under license.

    Google Play™ store, Google Wallet™ payment service, and Android™ platform are trademarks of Google LLC.

    Microsoft®, Windows®, and .NET® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

    All other system names and product names are the property of their respective owners

    Table 0-1

    Security

    The device always encrypts account data from all three reader types using 112-bit TDEA, 128-bit AES, or 256-bit AES algorithms with X9.24 DUKPT key management. This device does not support any mechanisms such as whitelists or SRED disable that would allow the data to be sent out unencrypted.

    The device includes the following cryptographic algorithms:

    • AES

    • TDEA

    • RSA

    Rev Number

    Date

    Notes

    108

    December 18, 2024

    Initial Release

    ECDSA (P256 and P521 curves)

  • SHA-256

  • The device implements the original AES/TDEA DUKPT as its only key management method. Use of any other method will invalidate PCI approval. DUKPT derives a new unique key for every transaction. For more details, see ANS X9.24 Part 3:2017.

    Key Name

    Size

    Algorithm

    Purpose

    Transport Keys

    32 bytes

    AES X9.143 KBPKs

    Key Injection

    The device does not support manual or plaintext cryptographic key entry. Only specialized tools, compliant with key management requirements and cryptographic methods, specifically ANSI X9.143, can be used for key loading. Use of any other methods will invalidate PCI approval.

    Keys should be replaced with new keys whenever the original key is known or suspected to have been compromised, and whenever the time deemed feasible to determine the key by exhaustive attack has elapsed, as defined in NIST SP 800-57-1.

    Account Data Protection

    Algorithms Supported

    Key Management

    Table - DynaFlex II Go Product Keys

    Key Loading

    Key Replacement

    Account Data Key

    16 bytes for TDEA and AES-128

    32 bytes for AES-256

    AES and TDEA DUKPT (ANS X9.24-3)

    Encrypt and MAC Account Data

    Firmware Protection Key

    64 bytes for

    ECDSA Curve P-256

    ECDSA and SHA-256

    Checks integrity and authenticity of firmware

    EMV CA Public keys

    Varies per issuer

    RSA

    Authenticate card data and keys

    Component Details

    The arrangement of the four LED indicators on DynaFlex II Go devices is illustrated in Figure 7-2. The LEDs are designated 1 to 4 and are ordered from left to right on the device.

    Figure - LED Ordering

    LED Status

    When DynaFlex II Go is powered on, its LEDs will illuminate green, when it is powered off, the LEDs will remain unlit.

    The figure below illustrates the On/Off status of the LEDs.

    Figure - LED ON/OFF

    BCR Status

    DynaFlex II Go devices equipped with a bar code reader have a status LED that indicates whether the barcode feature is scanning.

    BRC Status Light On BCR Status Light OFF

    Figure - BCR Status LED

    All DynaFlex II Go devices are equipped with a beeper that produces a short beep lasting for half a second and a long beep that lasts for one second.

    Downloads, Compliance, & Marketing Materials

    Downloads, Compliance, & Marketing Materials is where you get the files and formal documentation and product brochures for MagTek devices — firmware images, PCI security policies and certifications, and product marketing materials like brochures and videos. It's the home for the artifacts you download for a specific device, kept out of the developer path so the guides and reference stay focused on integration. Product hubs link here for their device-specific files.

    In This Section

    Reference Section

    Information Available

    This section holds links for non-firmware downloadable software for MagTek products, organized by device.

    Beeper Alert

    Compliance/Security

    This section contains universal compliance documents as well as compliance and security documentation for specific products.

    Device Manuals (Product-specific)

    Find documentation and instructions for product-specific functions including installation and operational manuals.

    Marketing Materials & Product Catalogs

    Brochures, data sheets, videos and catalogs.

    Need More Help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    • 📞 Phone: 1-800-788-6835 (US) | +1-562-546-6616 (International)

    • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 6:00 AM - 5:00 PM PST

    Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal:

    • 📚 Knowledge Base:

    • 💬 Developer Forum:

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    Downloadable Software

    Appendix A: Technical Specifications

    Reference Standards and Certifications

    • ISO 7810, ISO 7811, AAMVA

    • ISO/IEC 7816-1, 2, 3, & 4 Identification Cards Integrated Circuits with Contacts

    • EMV ICC Specifications for Payment Systems Version 4.3, L1 Contact and L2 Contact EMV Contactless Level 1 Version 3.0

    • MasterCard TQM

    • MCL v3.1.3, payWave v2.2, Expresspay 4.0.2, D-PAS Terminal Payment Application v1.0, D-PAS Terminal Application Specification Bulletins CL TAS-002 v1.1, CL TAS-003 v1.0, CL TAS-004 v1.0

    • PCI PTS POI v6.x PED

    • PCI PTS POI v6.x SCR

    • TDEA (3DES)-CBC using DUKPT

    • FCC Part 15 Low Power Transceiver, RX verified per FCC Title 47 Part 15 Subclass C

    • UL 60950 1, 2nd Edition, 2011 12 19 (Information Technology Equipment - Safety - Part 1: General

      Requirements), CSA C22.2 No. 60950 1 07, 2nd Edition, 2011 12 (Information Technology Equipment - Safety - Part 1: General Requirements)

    • CE Certified

    • UKCA Certified

    • CE Safety: IEC 62368-1: 2014UL/CSA 62368-1: 2nd Edition

    • Canada ISED Certified

    • Japan VCCI Certified (not applicable to WLAN models)

    • Japan MIC Certified (not applicable to WLAN models)

    • AS/NZS CISPR 32 (2013), AS/NZS 4268 Table 1, Row 59 DTS 2400-2483MHz SRD (WLAN), and

      AS/NZS 4268 (2017) Table 1, Row 43 13.553-13.567MHz (contactless reader)

    • RoHS Compliant the Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EEE) Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) European Directive 2002/95/EC

    • California Proposition 65 (California)

    • IPC-A-610 Class II Assembly

    • EU Directive Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) EU

    • Directive Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)

    • Universal Serial Bus Specifications 1.1, 2.0

    • IEEE 802.11 b/g/n, IEEE 802.11i-2004 WPA2-PSK, TKIP, AES, SHA-256

    • TCP/IP secured by Transport Layer Security (TLS) Protocol v1.2

    Physical Characteristics

    Dimensions (L x W x H):

    DynaFlex II and DynaFlex II PED:

    4.1 in. W x 3.7 in. L x 1.9 in. H (103.3mm x 95.1mm x 48.5mm)

    DynaFlex II Kiosk and DynaFlex II PED Kiosk:

    4.1 in. W x 3.7 in. L x 1.9 in. H (103.3mm x 95.1mm x 48.3mm)

    Weight

    DynaFlex II USB = 8.4 oz. (238g) DynaFlex II PED USB= 8.7 oz. (246g) DynaFlex II PED WLAN = 8.9 oz. (252g) Kiosk Models, add 1.1 oz. (30g)

    BCR Models, add 0.12 oz. (3.5g)

    Supported Mounting Options:

    · Adhesive mounting strips on the underside of the device

    · Lanyard mount point

    Reader Characteristics

    Magnetic Stripe Reader:

    Three track bidirectional encrypting reader with MagnePrint

    Magnetic Stripe Decoding:

    Financial (ISO Type B), AAMVA, or Other

    Reference Standards and Certifications

    Communication Characteristics

    Wired Connection Types:

    Physical Characteristics

    Reader Characteristics

    https://www.magtek.com/support
    https://support.magtek.com
    https://forum.magtek.com

    Magnetic Swipe Speeds:

    6 inches per second to 60 inches per second

    EMV Contact Reader:

    EMVCo L1 and L2 Contact Reader

    EMV Contactless Reader:

    EMVCo L1 and L2 Contactless Reader

    D-PAS, PayPass/MCL, payWave, Expresspay

    Mobile wallets including but not limited to Apple Pay, Google Pay, Samsung Pay

    Barcode Reader:

    Barcode Media: Labels, paper, smartphone / computer displays Barcode Types: QR Codes, Linear Barcodes, UPC-A, UPC-E, Code 128, PDF417 / Data Matrix, etc.

    Field Of View 31.5° total vertical sweep, 42° total horizontal sweep, perpendicular to device face

    Depth Of Field 1.2 in. (30mm) to 13.8 in. (350mm) Integrated white indicator LED

    User Interface Characteristics

    Status Indicators:

    4 RGB LEDs

    Display Type:

    TFT a-Si Active Matrix Color LCD with Touchscreen (Select Models)

    Display Size (viewable area):

    2.3 in. x 1.7 in. (57.6mm x 43.2mm) (Select Models)

    Display Resolution:

    320 x 240 px, 16-bit color depth (Select Models)

    Keypad:

    Touchscreen

    Security Characteristics

    Certifications:

    PCI PTS POI 6.xPED PCI PTS POI 6.x SCR

    Tamper Protection:

    The enclosure and associated electronics form a Tamper Resistant Security Module (TRSM) where attempts to penetrate or modify the

    unit cause all cryptographic keys to be cleared or rendered unusable.

    Electrical Characteristics

    Power Inputs:

    USB powered via USB-C receptacle or charging station connectors

    Power Outputs:

    None

    Battery Type:

    Lithium Polymer rechargeable

    Battery Capacity:

    2100 mAh nominal (rated)

    Battery Charge Time:

    ~7 hours connected to a 500mA host USB port

    Battery Time, Powered Off

    4 years or longer

    Battery Time, Standby:

    Wireless LAN: Reserved

    Battery Time, Transactions:

    Reserved

    Voltage Requirements:

    5 VDC from USB port

    Current Requirements:

    500mA from USB port

    Data Storage:

    Not Applicable

    USB-C, compatible with USB 1.1, USB 2.0

    Vendor-defined USB Human Interface Device (HID) data format

    Wireless Connection Types:

    TCP/IP over Wireless LAN (select models)

    Wireless Range:

    WLAN: 100m in a typical environment

    Wireless Frequencies and Power:

    Wireless LAN:

    Frequency range = 2400 MHz to 2484 MHz Average power radiated = 0.80 mW (-0.97 dBm) NFC:

    Frequency range = 13.56 MHz

    Maximum power conducted = 794 mW (29 dBm)

    RF Exposure:

    Exempt from SAR requirements due to radiated power substantially below regulatory thresholds.

    Software Characteristics

    Tested Operating System(s):

    USB Hosts: Windows 10, Windows 11

    Environmental Resistance

    Ingress Protection:

    Splash Resistant

    Operating Temperature:

    32°F to 113°F (0°C to 45°C)

    Operating Relative Humidity:

    Up to 90% non-condensing

    Storage Temperature:

    14°F to 140°F (-10°C to 60°C)

    Storage Relative Humidity:

    Up to 90% non-condensing

    Vibration Resistance:

    5Hz to 500Hz sinusoidal vibrations at 15g acceleration, all 3 axes

    Shock Resistance:

    30g 11ms terminal sawtooth shocks, all 3 axes

    ESD Tolerance (EMVCo):

    ±10kV air discharge when device is properly earth grounded

    ESD Tolerance (FCC/CE):

    ±8kV contact discharge / ±12kV air discharge when properly grounded

    Vapor Resistance:

    Not Applicable

    Reliability

    Shelf Life:

    24 months at 25°C nominal

    Magnetic Read Head Life:

    1 million swipes

    ICC Read Head Life:

    500,000 card insertions

    Battery Shelf Life:

    5 years or longer (backup battery)

    Battery Cycle Life:

    After 500 charge / discharge cycles, battery capacity remains above 80%.

    DynaFlex II Products Technical Specifications

    Submit feedback

    DynaFlex II PED Video

    Maintenance

    Caution: To avoid damaging the read head and contact block, only clean the MSR swipe path and insertion slot with approved cleaning cards.

    DO NOT use liquid cleaning products or insrt any other objects into the device.

    DO NOT apply any liquid directly onto the device, to avoid seepage into the electronics.

    Periodic cleaning of the device’s exterior may be required. To clean the outside of DynaFlex II products, including the LCD display, wipe down the device with a soft, slightly damp cloth and then wipe dry with a lint-free cloth. The display can also be cleaned using a slightly damp specialty cleaning cloth, like those used to wipe lenses, monitors, and smartphone displays.

    MagTek’s double-sided cleaning card is designed to clean the magnetic read head in the MSR swipe path and the contact pins inside all chip card contact readers. Keeping both components clean is essential to the device’s functioning. MagTek recommends swiping and inserting a cleaning card once per week to avoid card misreads.

    If the device’s micro-suction mounting feet lose their holding power over time, use a clean, damp, lint-free cloth to wipe the mounting feet and the mounting surface clean, then let both surfaces air dry. This should restore the mounting feet’s holding power. If the mounting feet are damaged and unusable, replacements are available. See Available Models and Accessories.

    Updates to Firmware, Documentation, Security Guidance

    In addition to the security guidance in the product manuals, MagTek may provide updates to this document, as well as supplemental security guidance or notices regarding vulnerabilities, at developer.magtek.com. MagTek advises checking the product’s home page periodically for the most up-to-date information.

    Any firmware updates addressing product features, bugs, or security vulnerabilities are also posted to developer.magtek.com or may be sent directly to affected customers. To update the device’s firmware:

    1. Obtain the firmware image to install.

    2. Download DynaFlex, DynaProx Firmware Upload Utility from the MagTek web site.

    3. Follow the instructions in DynaFlex, DynaProx Firmware Update Utility Manual included in the firmware update utility’s Document subfolder.

    Note: DynaFlex, DynaProx Test Utility can be utilized to upload new or updated firmware to DynaFlex II devices.

    Installation

    Installing DynaProx products is straightforward: The manufacturer or acquirer configures the preferred settings, keys, and terminal and payment brand settings before deployment; end users need only set up a host with appropriate software, configure the software, and connect the device to the host. This section provides general information about inspecting, connecting, and installing DynaProx products.

    About Inspection

    Before unpacking the device, it is important to inspect its secure packaging to make sure it has not been tampered with in storage or in transit. MagTek provides details for inspecting the integrity of the device’s secure packaging in DynaProx / DynaProx BCR Package Inspection.

    It is important to thoroughly inspect a new device before deployment, and regularly inspect devices in live usage (including its immediate surroundings) to make sure malicious individuals have not tampered with it. MagTek recommends conducting inspection training for all device operators, and an inspection schedule with checkpoints in place to make sure operators are performing inspections as specified and as scheduled. MagTek provides an easy-to-follow device inspection reference DynaProx / DynaProx BCR Device Inspection.

    About Host Software

    In any solution, DynaProx products are connected to a host, which must have software installed that knows how to communicate with the device, and which is capable of processing transactions. To set up the host to work with DynaProx, follow the installation and configuration instructions provided by the vendor of the host or the host software. For information about developing custom host software, see Developing Custom Software.

    Connecting to a Host

    About Connecting to a Host

    The following sections provide steps for connecting DynaProx to a host via the various available physical connection types.

    How to Connect DynaProx to a Host via USB

    Figure 4-1 - Connecting to a USB Host

    To connect DynaProx products to a USB host using the USB-C port, follow these steps (for reference see Figure 4-1 and section 1.4 About DynaProx Components): For best results, use the cable that is included with the device or another cable from . These cables are designed specifically for DynaProx products and include ferrite shielding at both ends of the cable to reduce emissions and interference. If the solution design requires an alternate cable, contact MagTek for assistance with ferrite selection and placement, and with connector over mold design.

    1. Connect the USB-C end of the cable to DynaProx.

    2. Connect the other end of the USB cable to the host’s USB port.

    3. As soon as the device starts receiving power through USB, it automatically powers on.

    4. If the specific device serial number you are connecting has not been connected to the host before, Windows system tray on the host reports it is Setting up a device , see Figure 4-2 – Device Setup. When installation is complete (approximately 30 seconds later depending on the host), Windows reports Device is Ready, (see Figure 4-3 – Setup Complete) and the device shows in Windows Device Manager under Human Interface Devices (see Figure 4-4 – Windows Device Manager) as two devices: HID-compliant vendor-defined device (see Figure 4-5 – HID Compliant Vendor-defined Device Properties) with VID 0801 and PID 2020, and USB Input Device.

    Figure 4-2 – Device Setup

    Figure 4-3 – Setup Complete

    Figure 4-4 – Windows Device Manager

    Figure 4-5 – HID Compliant Vendor-defined Device Properties

    1. The operating system may put the device into USB Suspend mode. DynaProx does not support USB Suspend mode since this device relies on USB full power support.

    The RS-232 interface on DynaProx will provide a UART interface at RS-232 signal levels. No flow control is provided. The signals provided are on J1 of DynaProx and are listed below. See Table 4-1 - RS-232 Signals.

    The RS-232 cable will be customer dependent. A sample cable can be provided that has the mating connector for DynaProx and color-coded wires. See Figure 4-6 - Cables and Connectors

    Figure 4-6 - Cables and Connectors

    The Chassis ground connection will also be a custom cable depending on the customer’s requirement.

    DynaProx products are designed to provide flexible mounting options:

    • The device can be mounted to custom mounting brackets or mounted in an enclosure as part of a larger solution design.

    • The device can be mounted to the optional stand for countertop use.

    This section provides information and guidelines for designing the mechanical aspects of a solution that incorporates DynaProx products. MagTek strongly recommends vetting and testing solution designs before finalizing and deploying them, to make sure the design meets all requirements (e.g., functional, legal, security, certification, safety, and so on).

    When designing the mechanical portions of a solution that incorporates DynaProx products, consider the following:

    • Review for an overall introduction to the device’s physical features and what they are called.

    • Review .

    • Review the information below about overall device dimensions and mounting hole locations and use.

    • Review any additional requirements from other agencies, such as PCI and EMV solution certification requirements, safety ordinances, and so on, which may introduce additional constraints to the design.

    Overall dimensions of the device are shown in Figure 4-7. On request, MagTek can provide a 3D model of the device’s envelope to assist with the mechanical portion of solution design. MagTek strongly recommends building and testing prototypes with actual devices before finalizing the solution design.

    Figure 4-7 - DynaProx Overall Dimensions

    The screw hole placement on the bottom of DynaProx products is detailed in Figure 4-8. The holes are designed to accommodate screw size M4 x 0.7mm and a maximum screw depth of 0.315 inches (8mm) into the device. The recommended torque range for installing the screws is 20 to 22 in-lbs. (2.3 to 2.5 N-m).

    When mounting DynaProx, make sure gasket is seated properly to ensure IP65 rating, see Figure 4-9.

    The suggested panel cutouts for the USB and RS-232 connectors are shown in Figure 4-10 with a DynaProx shown for reference. The dimensions for the suggested panel cutouts are shown in Figure 4-11.

    Figure 4-8 - DynaProx Mounting Hole Locations

    Figure 4-9 – DynaProx Gasket

    Figure 4-10 – DynaProx Suggested USB and RS-232 Panel Cutouts

    Figure 4-11 – DynaProx Suggested USB and RS-232 Panel Cutout Dimensions

    When designing the enclosure or mounting bracket, make sure there is adequate clearance for cardholders to tap or users to present a bar code. If the solution design includes mounting to metal surfaces, there will typically not be any impact to performance or card reading range. If the design of the enclosure includes mounting the DynaProx such that the top surface is flush with adjacent metal on the same plane, the range of the contactless reader may be reduced. By keeping the card reading plane a few millimeters above any adjacent metal surfaces or providing a few millimeters of gap between the reader and adjacent metal will assure acceptable card reading performance. Proximity to metal can reduce the device’s reading range.

    Major Components, see Figure 4-12 - DynaProx Major Components.

    Figure 4-12 - DynaProx Major Components

    Stand Contents:

    • Stand Body: The body of the stand. Angled for better ergonomics.

    • Cable Channel: Allows the cable to be channeled out the back of the stand body.

    • (4) M4 Screws: Attaches the stand body to the DynaProx device

    • (2) Flat-head Screws: Attaches the base plate to the stand body. Base Plate: Bottom of stand, can attach the stand to counter tops Installation of DynaProx Stand

    1. Place the DynaProx face down on a clean, soft surface to avoid scratching the front face of the device. Using minimal toque, use (4) M4 screws to attach the stand to the body

    Figure 4-13 - Suggested Installation for DynaProx Stand

    1. Insert the cable and connect securely to the DynaProx device. Clip the cable securely into the cable management hooks. Channel the cable outside the back end of the stand body.

    Figure 4-14 - Cable Management

    1. Align the assembly base plate and using the (2) flat-head screws, screw the base plate to the stand body. See Figure 4-15 – Baseplate Installation.

    Figure 4-15 – Baseplate Installation

    1. Assembly is complete. Additionally, you can secure the base plate to almost any surface using (2) additional screws, not included.

    Securing DynaProx Stand to Surface

    Follow Steps 1 through 2, then:

    • Place baseplate on the location where you want to secure the device. Trace the baseplate and mark the two screw set locations (Drawn Outline). Remove the baseplate and drill down through the surface, checking to make certain everything is clear beneath.

    • Attach the baseplate to the stand body following step 3. Then align the surface to the tracing.

    • Using (2) M4 x 0.7mm thread pitch (not included) screws, screw up through the pre-drilled holes to the baseplate. Screws should be long enough to go through the surface and no more than 0.25” into the stand body.

    Figure 4-16 - Recommended Disassembly Procedure

    Repeat assembly in reverse order to remove device from counter installation and stand. See Figure 4-16 - Recommended Disassembly Procedure.

    Introduction

    DynaFlex II is a secure card reader authenticator engineered for attended, unattended, and mobile payment environments. The reader features a magnetic stripe reader, EMV chip reader for both contact and contactless cards, an optional barcode reader, and support for NFC-enabled mobile wallets such as Samsung Pay®, Google Pay®, Apple Pay®, and Apple VAS. DynaFlex II communicates with host devices via USB or wireless local area network (WLAN) on pin entry devices (PED). DynaFlex II products are compatible with iOS, Android, and Windows operating systems.

    In this document, DynaFlex II products are referred to as the device or inclusively as DynaFlex II products. They are designed to be connected to a host, which is a piece of general-purpose electronic equipment which sends commands and data to, and receives data from, the device. Host types include PC and Mac computers/laptops, tablets, and smartphones. The host must have software installed that communicates with the device and is capable of processing transactions. During a transaction, the host and its software interact with the operator, such as a customer service representative, while the device interacts with the cardholder (even if the cardholder is using a virtual representation of the card account, such as a smartphone).

    Throughout this document:

    • DynaFlex II Product Family refers to all devices in the DynaFlex II family, including all DynaFlex II models and DynaFlex II PED models.

    Introduction

    DynaProx and DynaProx BCR deliver the next generation in touchless payment acceptance. Both models come standard with contactless EMV and near field communication (NFC) technology for original equipment manufacturers (OEM), merchants, banks, and other developers looking to build a secure payment solution that accepts contactless EMV and NFC payments. Ideal for kiosks, vending machines, unattended payment terminals, and even countertop deployment with the optional stand, touchless payment and barcode scanning are made fast, reliable, and secure.

    DynaProx and DynaProx BCR are equipped with the next generation of security and the MagneSafe® Security Architecture (MSA). The design and architecture meet the requirements for contactless EMV 3.0, PCI PTS POI v6.1, and support triple DEA encryption with DUKPT Key Management.

    DynaProx and DynaProx BCR are easy to install and configure, with key features that include:

    • Contactless EMV 3.0 approved.

    Introduction

    DynaFlex II Go and DynaFlex II Go with Barcode Reader (BCR) deliver the next generation of mobile payment solutions. Both models offer an integrated secure card reader authenticator for magnetic stripe cards, EMV chip cards (contact and contactless), and NFC enabled mobile wallets including Samsung Pay, Google Pay™ with support for Google VAS, and Apple Pay® with support for Apple VAS. Ideal for cafés, restaurants, boutiques, airlines, retail banks and other developers looking to build a secure payment solution that accepts contactless EMV and NFC payments. DynaFlex II Go is suited for deployment in many scenarios, including mobile handsets, tablets, and desktop computers.

    DynaFlex II Go and DynaFlex II Go BCR are equipped with MagneSafe® Security Architecture (MSA). The design and architecture meet the requirements for contactless EMV 3.1, PCI PTS POI v6.2, and support triple DEA encryption with DUKPT Key Management.

    DynaFlex II Go and DynaFlex II Go BCR are easy to install and configure, with key features that include:

    • Contactless EMV 3.1 Approved.

    Operation

    The operator initiates a transaction from the host, and the cardholder interacts with the device. Transaction types may include retail transactions, new accounts, teller window applications, checking, savings, mortgages, and any other type of transaction where there is interaction between the cardholder and the operator.

    For each transaction type, the host software directs the cardholder. The transaction flow on the device may differ depending on what the host software specifies and what the cardholder does. Section 7.9 Card Reading provides examples of the cardholder experience for each type of payment. If the device cannot read payment data, the host software may require the cardholder to repeat the action or require the host to reject the transaction.

    All DynaFlex II Go devices have a single physical button, see Figure 6-1 - Power Button. Pressing and holding this button can activate extra functions. To active a specific function, press and hold the button until a specific number of beeps are heard. Table 6-1 - Button Functions contains functions that can be activated. Beep counts that are not listed are not supported.

    Appendix B - Barcode Reader Symbologies

    Barcode symbology refers to the way in which data is encoded in a barcode. It uses either spaced lines, dots, or squares. When read, these symbols are decoded and converted to data. The table below lists all of the supported symbologies and which are enabled by default.

    800 mA recommended

    2

    5V

    3

    TXD

    output of DynaProx

    4

    RXD

    input to DynaProx

    5

    GND

    6

    GND

    DynaProx

    Comment

    PIN/WIRE

    SIGNAL

    1

    Note: A poor quality cable, or cable longer than 12ft in length, can result in unexpected reader resets. Refer to Table 1-2 - DynaProx Accessories for cable options.

    How to Connect DynaProx to a Host via RS-232

    RS-232 Signals

    RS-232 Cable

    Chassis Ground

    Mounting

    About Mounting

    How to Mount DynaProx

    Caution: This document describes how to use DynaProx securely. Using the device in any way other than the approved methods described in this document invalidates the PCI PTS approval of the device.

    Not following the guidelines in this section could damage the device, render it inoperable, and/or violate the conditions of the warranty.

    How to Mount the Stand

    Disassembly

    DynaProx Accessories
    About DynaProx Components
    Appendix A: Technical Specifications

    5V

    Aztec

    Enabled

    Codabar

    Enabled

    Code 11

    Disabled

    Code128

    Enabled

    Code 32

    Disabled

    Code 39

    Enabled

    Code 93

    Disabled

    Data Matrix

    Enabled

    EAN-8

    Enabled

    EAN-13

    Enabled

    Febraban

    Disabled

    GSI-128 (UCC/EAN-128)

    Enabled

    GS1 Databar (RSS)

    Disabled

    Industrial 25

    Disable

    Interleaved 2 of 5,

    Enabled

    ISSN

    Disabled

    ISBN

    Disabled

    ITF-14

    Disabled

    ITF-6

    Disabled

    Matrix 2 of 5

    Enabled

    Micro QR

    Disabled

    MSI Plessey

    Disabled

    PDF417

    Enabled

    Plessey

    Disabled

    QR Code

    Enabled

    Standard 25

    Disabled

    UPC-E

    Enabled

    UPC-A

    Enabled

    Symbology

    Default

    AIM 128

    Table - Barcode Reader Supported Symbologies

    Disabled

    DynaFlex II PED refers to DynaFlex II PED products with a display, including those with a kiosk back cover and barcode reader.

  • DynaFlex II refers to DynaFlex II devices that are not equipped with a touchscreen display, including those with a kiosk back cover and barcode reader.

  • DynaFlex II products can be paired with Magensa Services to make the certification cycle easier and remove unencrypted data from the payment environment. A service representative will collaborate with you to determine what service best for you.

    For faster development, use MagneFlex Prism, a suite of interface tools for browser and middleware applications that streamline the development process. Instead of creating multiple interfaces for the hardware device, POS application, and gateway, you can use MagneFlex. It drives the hardware, interfaces with the POS app, and handles data processing commands.

    Part No.

    Description

    Display

    Connection(s)

    21078307

    DYNAFLEX II, PCI, BLACK, USB

    None

    USB-C

    Part #

    Description

    Accessory Notes

    1000006016

    CABLE, USB A - C, 6FT, DYNAFLEX

    Included with DynaFlex products

    1000006017

    The major components of the DynaFlex II product family are detailed in this section. For models without a touchscreen display (DynaFlex II and DynaFlex II Kiosk), the components are identical however, the touchscreen and its bezel are replaced with a faceplate displaying the contactless indicator logo at the optimal contactless landing zone (see Figure 1-1).

    Figure 1-1 - DynaFlex II Major components

    DynaFlex II PED models without a barcode reader are also identical however, the edge incorporating the barcode reader is a single straight line and there is no QR code marking on the face of the device (see Figure 1-2).

    Figure 1-2 - DynaFlex II PED BCR Major Components

    Figure 1-3 illustrates the major components of the optional charging station. Note, the charging station is only compatible with non-kiosk models of the device.

    Figure 1-3 - Charging Station Major Components

    About Terminology

    Magensa Services

    MagTek Support

    Available Models and Accessories

    Accessories

    About DynaFlex II Components

    PCI PTS POI v6.1approved.
  • Optical reading for many 2D and 1D barcodes including PayPal and Venmo (DynaProx BCR model required).

  • Transducer for audio alerts.

  • User configurable audio commands to play a sequence of tones.

  • USB (USB-C) or RS-232 interface

  • Triple DEA encryption / DUKPT key management.

  • Impact protection - IK 08.

  • Ingress protection - IP 66.

  • Apple Pay® / Apple Wallet® (Apple VAS protocol support).

  • NFC Compatibility: Smart cards and contactless IC products, including MIFARE Classic / MIFARE DESFire /MIFARE Plus cards, with the ability to send pass-through commands.

  • Optional countertop stand.

  • Hard mounting points to match common kiosk and ATM bezel mounts.

  • Flexible cable management.

  • Touchless payments are fast, convenient, and meet the needs of new growing markets. Major banks and card issuers are investing in contactless EMV cards and other barcodes. Combined with the rise of mobile wallets like Apple Pay, Samsung Pay, Google Pay, and others, there are major opportunities to deliver a reliable and affordable contactless EMV, NFC, and barcode reading device that is used in a variety of deployment scenarios.

    Designed to simplify development efforts, DynaProx and DynaProx BCR are available with either a USB or RS-232 interface (with power provided over USB or separately powered for RS-232) and are compatible with Windows and Android applications. The beeper provides auditory feedback to cardholders and operators delivering a more universal appeal. Contact a representative to find the best fit for your application and to request the software developer kits (SDKs) and application programming interfaces (APIs).

    Figure 1-1 shows the major components of DynaProx with barcode reader. Models without a barcode reader are identical to the diagram, but do not have a camera and do not have a QR code printed on the front face.

    Figure 1-1 - DynaProx Major Components

    Part No.

    Description

    Display

    Connection(s)

    Notes

    21078013

    DYNAPROX, PCI, BLACK, USB AND RS-232

    None

    Part #

    Description

    Accessory Notes

    1000007268

    CABLE, USB-C 90° RIGHT ANGLE TO USB TYPE A MALE USB 2.0, 6FT

    Included with DynaProx products

    1000005076

    In this document, DynaProx products are referred to as the device. They are designed to be connected to a host, which is a piece of general-purpose electronic equipment which can send commands and data to, and receive data from, the device. Host types include PC and Mac computers/laptops, tablets, and smartphones. Generally, the host must have software installed that communicates with the device and is capable of processing transactions. During a transaction, the host and its software interact with the operator, such as a customer service representative, while the device interacts with the cardholder (even if the cardholder is using a virtual representation of the card account, such as a smartphone).

    Key Features

    Build for New Markets

    Easier Integration

    About DynaProx Components

    Available Models and Accessories

    Available Models and Options

    DynaProx Accessories

    About Terminology

    Contact EMV 4.4a Approved.
  • PCI PTS POI v6.2 Approved.

  • Optical reading for many 2D and 1D barcodes including PayPal and Venmo (DynaFlex II Go BCR Model Only).

  • Transducer for audio alerts.

  • User configurable audio commands to play a sequence of tones.

  • Bluetooth® Low Energy (LE).

  • USB-C interface.

  • iAP2® Protocol Support.

  • Triple DEA encryption / DUKPT key management.

  • AES-128 and AES-256 encryption.

  • Ingress protection - IP 30.

  • Apple Pay® / Apple Wallet® (Apple VAS protocol support).

  • Google Wallet Smart Tap. (Google VAS protocol support).

  • Google Pay™.

  • NFC Compatibility: Smart cards and contactless IC products, including MIFARE Classic / MIFARE DESFire /MIFARE Plus cards, with the ability to send pass-through commands.

  • Optional OtterBox® uniVERSE® case.

  • Optional countertop stand.

  • Figure 1-1 illustrates the major components of DynaFlex II Go (BCR model shown). Models without a barcode reader are identical to the illustration, but do not have a camera and do not have a QR code printed on the front face.

    Figure - DynaFlex II Go Major Components

    Part No.

    Description

    Display

    Connection(s)

    Operating Systems

    21078400

    DynaFlex II Go, PCI, BCR, BLACK, BLUETOOTH LE

    None

    Part #

    Description

    Accessory Notes

    1000005076

    CABLE, USB-C TO USB TYPE A MALE USB 2.0, 20AWG

    Optional, specify in order

    1000006016

    In this document, DynaFlex II Go products are referred to as the device. They are designed to be connected to a host, which is a piece of general-purpose electronic equipment that can send commands and data to, and receive data from, the device. Host types include PC and Mac computers/laptops, tablets, and smartphones. Generally, the host must have software installed that communicates with the device and is capable of processing transactions. During a transaction, the host and its software interact with the operator, such as a customer service representative, while the device interacts with the cardholder (even if the cardholder is using a virtual representation of the card account, such as a smartphone).

    Key Features and Components

    Available Models and Accessories

    Table - Available Models and Options

    Table - DynaFlex II Go Accessories

    About Terminology

    Function

    2

    Power Off

    Hold for two beeps to power the device off. The device will reboot if it is connected to USB when powered off.

    3

    Settings Menu

    SoftAP Mode in the Settings Menu is Available on WLAN enabled devices only.

    4

    BLE Pairing

    BLE Enabled devices only.

    5

    Demo

    See Appendix C for more information.

    6

    Battery Level

    Light the LEDs to indicate the current state of charge of the battery. The LEDs will light for 3 seconds then return to their original state.

    See table bvelow for LED indicators

    DynaFlex II Go has only green LEDs. Instead of lighting the first LED in amber, it will slowly flash the first LED. Instead of Red, the first LED will flash quickly.

    During operation, DynaFlex II Go devices transition between distinct operating modes, which are important for operators to understand:

    • Powered Off Mode is the shipping and storage mode of the device. No external power is applied to the device through the USB cable or from the internal rechargeable battery. In this mode, the device consumes very little power. To set the device from Powered Off mode to Active Mode, connect the device to USB power, or press the power button, see Figure 6-1 - Power Button .

    • Active Mode is the device’s normal “awake” state when it is in use. In this mode, the device LED indicators are powered on, and the device is ready to receive commands from the host. For more information on Status LEDs and LED behavior see sections 7.4 About the Status LEDs, 7.5 Bluetooth® Low Energy (LE) LED Behavior, 7.5.7 DynaFlex II Go Bluetooth® Low Energy (LE) Sleep Mode

    When in Bluetooth® LE Sleep Mode, DynaFlex II Go will conserve battery life by limiting power to non-essential hardware features and entering low power mode. When in Sleep Mode, the device will appear to be powered off, with no LEDs illuminated, see Figure 7-15 – Bluetooth® (LE) Sleep Mode. For information on how to disable this feature, see D998200597 DynaFlex II Go Programmer’s Manual (COMMANDS).

    Figure – Bluetooth® (LE) Sleep Mode

    • LED Behavior: Successful Transactions, and 7.7 LED Behavior: Errors, Timeouts, and Canceled Transactions. To set the device from Active mode to Powered Off mode remove power press and hold the power button for two beeps.

    • BLE Sleep Mode is a standard feature that conserves battery life by limiting power to non-essential hardware features. When in Sleep Mode, the device will appear to be powered off, with no LEDs illuminated, see 7.5.7 DynaFlex II Go Bluetooth® Low Energy (LE) Sleep Mode, for more information on BLE Sleep Mode.

    DynaFlex II Go products have a beeper that provides feedback to operators and cardholders about the internal state of the device:

    • The device sounds one short beep after it has successfully read a contactless tap, and the cardholder can safely remove the card or device from the contactless landing zone.

    • The device emits two beeps when reading a card or contactless payment device to indicate a card read error occurred.

    • The device sounds two beeps when an operator cancels a pending EMV transaction. The device provides an internal setting the host can use to adjust the global system volume. The device does not provide an interface to change the volume setting directly via buttons. If the device is too quiet or too loud:

      • Make sure the device is being ordered from the manufacturer with the desired volume setting.

      • Check to see whether the host software you are using provides a feature to check and/or adjust the volume setting.

    • If the host software does not provide that feature, request help from the development team that built the host software to check / change the volume setting. For details, see D998200597 DynaFlex II Go Programmer’s Manual (COMMANDS).

    To play a sequence of tones, follow these steps:

    • Make sure the device is in idle state.

    • Send an audio command to the device to play a sequence of tones. For details, see D998200597 DynaFlex II Go Programmer’s Manual (COMMANDS).

    Operation Overview

    Physical Button Operation

    Table - Button Functions

    Beep Count

    About Operating Modes

    About Sounds

    How to Play a Sequence of Tones

    General Description

    The front view of iDynamo 5 Gen III, is shown in Figure 2-1 below. The back view of iDynamo 5 Gen III is shown in Figure 2-2. The side views of iDynamo 5 Gen III can be seen in Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-4. The Top View displaying the pushbutton and LED indicator can be seen in Figure 2-5, and the Bottom View displaying the USB-C receptacle can be seen in Figure 2-6.

    Figure 2-1 - Front View

    Figure 2-2 - Back View

    Figure 2-3 - Left Side View

    Figure 2-4 - Right Side view

    Figure 2-5 - Top View

    Acronyms

    Developing Custom Software

    Custom host software uses the same underlying device command set for all DynaFlex II Go product connection types. This section provides high-level information about communicating with the device via the various physical connection types in various software development frameworks, and provides pointers to available SDKs, which include sample code. Product documentation and SDKs are available for download by searching for the product name on and navigating to the tab.

    MagTek provides convenient SDKs and corresponding documentation for many programming languages and operating systems. The API libraries included in the SDKs wrap the details of the connection in an interface that conceptually parallels the device’s internal operation, freeing software developers to focus on the business logic, without having to deal with the complexities of platform APIs for connecting to the various available connection types, communicating using the various available protocols, and parsing the various available data formats. Information about using MagTek wrapper APIs is available in separate documentation, including:

    • D998200380 MagTek Universal SDK Programmer’s Manual (Microsoft .NET)

    D998200381 MagTek Universal SDK Programmer’s Manual (Microsoft C++ )

  • D998200385 MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices Programmer’s Manual (Java)

  • D998200386 MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices Programmer’s Manual (iOS)

  • D998200387 MagTek Universal SDK Programmer’s Manual (Android)

  • The documentation is bundled with the SDKs themselves, which include:

    · 1000007351 MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices (Windows)

    · 1000007352 MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices (Android)

    The SDKs and corresponding documentation include:

    • Functions for sending the direct commands described in this manual

    • Wrappers for commonly used commands that further simplify development

    • Sample source code to demonstrate how to communicate with the device using the direct commands described in this manual

    To download the SDKs and documentation, search www.magtek.com for “SDK” and select the SDK and documentation for the programming languages and platforms you need or contact MagTek Support Services for assistance.

    In addition to the SDK API libraries, software developers also have the option to revert to direct communication with the device using libraries using the operating system’s native USB and serial port libraries. For example, custom software written in Visual Basic or Visual C++ may make API calls to the standard Windows USB HID driver. For more information about sending commands directly, see D998200597 DynaFlex II Go Programmer’s Manual (COMMANDS).

    For more information about developing custom applications that integrate with DynaFlex II Go, see the MagTek web site or contact your reseller or MagTek Support Services.

    www.magtek.com

    21078309

    DYNAFLEX II PED, PCI, TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY, BLACK, USB

    Touchscreen

    USB-C

    21078311

    DYNAFLEX II PED, PCI, TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY, BLACK, WLAN

    Touchscreen

    USB-C

    Wireless LAN

    21078314

    DYNAFLEX II KIOSK, PCI, BCR, BLACK, USB

    None

    USB-C

    21078321

    DYNAFLEX II PED, KIOSK, PCI, TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY, BLACK, USB

    Touchscreen

    USB-C

    21078322

    DYNAFLEX II, KIOSK, PCI, BLACK, USB

    None

    USB-C

    21078325

    DYNAFLEX II PED, KIOSK, PCI, TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY, BLACK, WLAN

    Touchscreen

    USB-C

    Wireless LAN

    21078331

    DYNAFLEX II, PCI, BCR, BLACK, USB

    None

    USB-C

    21078332

    DYNAFLEX II PED, PCI, TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY, BCR, BLACK, WLAN

    Touchscreen

    USB-C

    Wireless LAN

    21078333

    DYNAFLEX II PED, PCI, TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY, BCR, BLACK, USB

    Touchscreen

    USB-C

    21078334

    DYNAFLEX II PED, KIOSK, PCI, TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY, BCR, BLACK, USB

    Touchscreen

    USB-C

    All models are black by default and have countertop, handheld, and custom mounting options.

    CABLE, USB C - C, 6FT, DYNAFLEX

    Optional, specify in order

    21078006

    CHARGING STATION, DYNAFLEX

    Optional, specify in order

    96700004

    CLEANING CARD, DOUBLE SIDED

    Optional, specify in order

    1000008559

    FOOT, BACK, SIDE A, ADHESIVE MOUNTING STRIP, DYNAFLEX

    Optional, specify 1 ea. for complete replacement

    1000008560

    FOOT, BACK, SIDE B, ADHESIVE MOUNTING STRIP, DYNAFLEX

    Optional, specify 1 ea. for complete replacement

    1000008561

    FOOT, FRONT, ADHESIVE MOUNTING STRIP, DYNAFLEX

    Optional, specify 1 ea. For complete replacement

    USB-C, RS-232

    MS Windows, Mac OS, Linux; Android Phone

    21078028

    DYNAPROX, PCI, BCR, BLACK, USB AND RS-232

    None

    USB-C, RS-232

    MS Windows, Mac OS, Linux; Android Phone

    21078043

    DYNAPROX, PCI, BLACK, USB AND RS-232, COUNTERTOP STAND

    None

    USB-C, RS-232

    MS Windows, Mac OS, Linux; Android Phone

    21078044

    DYNAPROX, PCI, BCR, BLACK, USB AND RS-232, COUNTERTOP STAND

    None

    USB-C, RS-232

    MS Windows, Mac OS, Linux; Android Phone

    CABLE, USB-C 90° RIGHT ANGLE TO USB TYPE A MALE USB 2.0, 3FT

    Optional, specify in order

    21078012

    DYNAPROX, KIT COUNTERTOP STAND

    Kit only

    1000007189

    DynaProx Gasket

    One (1) included with each DynaProx products. Replacement gaskets specify in order.

    21078077

    RS-232 Cable for Development use

    Intended for development use only to connect to the RS-232 Port

    USB-C, Bluetooth® (LE), iAP2®

    MS Windows, Mac OS, Linux; Android Phone

    21078401

    DynaFlex II Go, PCI, BLACK, BLUETOOTH LE

    None

    USB-C, Bluetooth® (LE), iAP2®

    MS Windows, Mac OS, Linux; Android Phone

    21078402

    DynaFlex II Go, PCI, BCR, BLACK

    None

    USB-C, iAP2®

    MS Windows, Mac OS, Linux; Android Phone

    21078403

    DynaFlex II Go, PCI, BLACK

    None

    USB-C, iAP2®

    MS Windows, Mac OS, Linux; Android Phone

    21078404

    DynaFlex II Go, PCI, BCR, BLACK, BLUETOOTH LE, LOCKED MAGENSA BUNDLE LMB

    None

    USB-C, Bluetooth® (LE), iAP2®

    MS Windows, Mac OS, Linux; Android Phone

    21078405

    DynaFlex II Go, PCI, BLACK, BLUETOOTH LE, LOCKED MAGENSA BUNDLE LMB

    None

    USB-C, Bluetooth® (LE), iAP2®

    MS Windows, Mac OS, Linux; Android Phone

    21078406

    DynaFlex II Go, PCI, BCR, BLACK, LOCKED MAGENSA BUNDLE LMB

    None

    USB-C, iAP2®

    MS Windows, Mac OS, Linux; Android Phone

    21078407

    DynaFlex II Go, PCI, BLACK, LOCKED MAGENSA BUNDLE LMB

    None

    USB-C, iAP2®

    MS Windows, Mac OS, Linux; Android Phone

    USB CABLE TYPE A – C, 6FT

    Optional, specify in order

    1000006017

    USB CABLE TYPE C, 6FT

    Optional, specify in order

    21078408

    DYNAFLEX II GO, KIT COUNTERTOP STAND

    Refer to Appendix C Optional Accessories for additional information.

    21078409

    DYNAFLEX II GO ADAPTOR FOR OTTERBOX

    Refer to Appendix C Optional Accessories for additional information.

    21078410

    DYNAFLEX II GO RUBBER SLEEVE

    Refer to Appendix C Optional Accessories for additional information.

    21078411

    DYNAFLEX II GO RUBBER SLEEVE HALF SIZE

    Refer to Appendix C Optional Accessories for additional information.

    Note: At least one cable will be shipped with the device, specify when ordering.

    CTLS

    Contactless

    DES

    Data Encryption Standard

    DUKPT

    Derived Unique Key Per Transaction

    ECC

    Elliptic-Curve Cryptography

    FSK

    Firmware Signing Key

    ICCR

    Integrated Circuit Card Reader

    MAC

    In cryptography: Message Authentication Code In networking: Media Access Control [address]

    MSR

    Magnetic Stripe Reader

    NFC

    Near Field Communication

    POI

    Point Of Interaction

    S/N

    Serial Number

    SCRA

    Secure Card Reader Authenticator

    SHA

    Secure Hash Algorithm

    SRED

    Secure Reading and Exchange of Data

    TDEA

    Triple Data Encryption Algorithm

    USB

    Universal Serial Bus

    USB HID

    USB Human Interface Device

    Acronym

    Definition

    AES

    Advanced Encryption Standard

    BCR

    Barcode Reader

    Figure 2-6 - Bottom View

    iDynamo 5 Gen III devices include a USB-C interface for Power and Communications, and a magnetic stripe reader (MSR). It is designed for attended and unattended environments.

    iDynamo 5 Gen III can be used as a desktop or handheld device. It is approved as a secure card reader (SCR) under PCI PTS POI v6.2 requirements.

    Usage in any other environment will invalidate PCI approval.

    To find important product identification information, look for the printed product label on the back face of the device as shown in Figure 2-7 below.

    Figure 2-7 – iDynamo 5 Gen III Device Label Location

    The product label includes the following elements of device identification information, shown by the numbered callouts in Figure 2-8.

    • Product Name

    • PCI Hardware Identifier (“HW”)

    Figure 2-8 -iDynamo 5 Gen III Device Label

    The label also contains other supporting information about the device.

    The hardware version of the device is 10PCI50U0xAx . All iDynamo 5 Gen III hardware configurations are listed in Table 2-1 below. The device utilizes one interface type, USB-C. Use of any interface otherthan USB-C will invalidate PCI approval.

    PCI ID Tag

    Configuration Description

    10PCI50U0BA0

    iDynamo 5 Gen III, PCI, BLACK

    PCI Hardware ID Number

    1

    2

    3

    4

    5

    6
    7

    8

    Fixed Position

    Variable "X" Position

    Description of Fixed or Variable “X” in the Selection Position

    1-2

    10 = iDynamo 5 Gen III

    3-5

    The most recent firmware versions for iDynamo 5 Gen III products are 1000009547-AAx-PCI for the secure bootloader, and 1000009535-AAx-PCI for the main firmware. The lowercase x in firmware versions indicates minor non-security related changes, see Table 2-3 and Table 2-4.

    Firmware Number

    1

    2

    3

    4

    5

    6
    7

    8

    Fixed Position

    Variable “x” Position

    Description of Fixed or Variable “x” in the Selected Position

    1-10

    1000009535 = iDynamo 5 Gen III Main Firmware Part Number

    11

    Firmware Number

    1

    2

    3

    4

    5

    6
    7

    8

    Fixed Position

    Variable “x” Position

    Description of Fixed or Variable “x” in the Selected Position

    1-10

    1000009547 = iDynamo 5 Gen III Boot Firmware Part Number

    11

    All device identification information, including firmware versions and PCI Hardware ID, is accessible by connecting iDynamo 5 Gen III to a host device via USB-C using the latest software provided by MagTek, as seen in Figure 2-9 - Device Information Screen.

    The host user can retrieve device information at any time using Command 0x0000 Get Property as described in [3].

    Figure 2-9 - Device Information Screen

    Product Name and Appearance

    Product Type

    Identification

    Hardware Identification

    Table 2-1 - PCI Hardware Identifier

    Table 2-2 – Hardware Versions with Description of Associated Variables

    Firmware Identification

    Table - Main Firmware Version and Associated Variables

    Table - Boot Firmware Version and Associated Variables

    Security

    The device always encrypts account data from the MSR using 112-bit TDEA, 128-bit AES, or 256-bit AES algorithms with X9.24 DUKPT key management. This device does not support any mechanisms such as whitelists or SRED disable that would allow the data to be sent out unencrypted. The programmers need to follow the guidance provided in [3]. Use of the device with key-management systems not described in this policy will invalidate the PCI PTS POI v6.2 approval of the device.

    The device includes the following cryptographic algorithms:

    • AES-128/256

    • TDEA-128

    x

    A

    A

    x

    -

    P

    C

    I

    A

    A

    x

    -

    P

    C

    I

    9

    10

    11

    12

    1

    0

    P

    C

    I

    5
    0

    U

    0

    x

    PCI = PCI Hardware

    6

    Device Options 5 = Standard

    7

    Option RFU (Reserved for Future Use) RFU 0 = as Certified

    8

    Interface Options U = USB

    9

    Option RFU (Reserved for Future Use) RFU 0 = as Certified

    11

    10

    Cover Color: B = Black

    11

    Version A = as Certified

    11

    12

    minor fixes not adding functionality or related to security (e.g., change component value for antenna matching): 0 = as certified

    9

    10

    11

    12

    13

    14

    15

    16

    17

    18

    1

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0
    9

    5

    3

    5

    Delimiter (-)

    12-13

    AA = Certified Version

    14

    Minor Revisions, Bug Fixes

    15

    Delimiter (-)

    16-18

    PCI = PCI Version of Firmware

    9

    10

    11

    12

    13

    14

    15

    16

    17

    18

    1

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0
    9

    5

    3

    5

    Delimiter (-)

    12-13

    AA = Certified Version

    14

    Minor Revisions, Bug Fixes

    15

    Delimiter (-)

    16-18

    PCI = PCI Version of Firmware

    A

    -

    -

    Configuration

    The device does not have an on-screen configuration interface. However, it does have settings the host can change using commands. These settings are documented as Properties in D998200597 DynaFlex II Go Programmer’s Manual (COMMANDS).

    ECDSA (P256 and P521)
  • RSA2048

  • SHA-256

  • The device implements the original AES/TDEA DUKPT as its only key management method. Use of any other method will invalidate PCI approval. DUKPT derives a new unique key for every transaction. For more details, see [5] and [6].

    Key Name

    Size

    Algorithm

    Purpose

    Transport Keys:

    · Master Transport Key

    · Device Transport Key

    · Financial Transport Key

    · Production Transport Key

    · Manufacturing Transport Key

    · MagTek KIF Financial Transport Key

    32 bytes

    AES X9.143 KBPKs

    Key Injection

    The device does not support manual or plaintext cryptographic key entry. Only specialized tools, compliant with key management requirements and cryptographic methods, specifically [6] and [7]. On the production line, the ANSI X9.143 format can be used for key loading by an HSM after mutual authentication. Use of any other methods will invalidate PCI approval.

    Keys should be replaced with new keys whenever the original key is known or suspected to have been compromised, and whenever the time deemed feasible to determine the key by exhaustive attack has elapsed, as defined in [4].

    Account Data Protection

    Algorithms Supported

    Key Management

    Table 5-1 - iDynamo 5 Gen III Product Keys

    Key Loading

    Key Replacement

    Installation and User Guidance

    Initial Inspection

    After receiving the device, the customer should visually inspect the product as follows:

    • Inspect the label found on the bottom of the device (see section 2.3.1 Hardware Identification) and make sure the label is not missing, obscured, or modified.

    • Check the PCI Hardware Identifier on the device label and make sure it matches the Hardware # listed for the device on the PCI web site for Approved Devices. Go to the PCI compliance web page and search for MagTek, and find the product name, DynaFlex II Go. Compare the Hardware ID and Firmware ID: https://www.pcisecuritystandards.org/assessors_and_solutions/pin_transaction_devices

    Note: Firmware ID is accessible by connecting DynaFlex II Go to a host device via USB or Bluetooth LE, using the latest software provided by MagTek (see section 2.3.2 Firmware Identification).

    • Check the Device serial number (SN) and make sure it matches with labels on shipping materials and documentation.

    • Visually inspect the device, per D998200593 DynaFlex II Go, Device Inspection Document, which is included in the package with each device. See section 4.1 Periodic Inspection for more information regarding visual inspection of the device.

    • Follow the steps in section 2.3.2 to view the PCI firmware versions installed on the device. Make sure this matches one of the Firmware # values listed on the PCI web site for DynaFlex II Go. Note that in PCI listings, lowercase “x” is a wildcard meaning ‘any single character.’

    Connect the device to a USB host for control and power (if battery power is not sufficient). DynaFlex II Go products are designed to provide flexible mounting options such as:

    • External clip

    • Embedded lanyard

    The specified environmental conditions to operate and store the device are:

    • Operating temperature range: 0°C to 35°C / 5% to 90% RH

    • Storage temperature range: -20°C to 45°C / 5% to 90% RH

    For safety, battery charging is disabled when the device is outside the recommended operating temperature range.

    The security of the reader is not compromised by altering the environmental conditions outside the stated operating ranges above. Any temperature or operating voltage outside the values in the table below will trigger environmental security protections, resulting in a tamper condition. The device will need to be returned to the factory for inspection before this condition can be cleared.

    DynaFlex II Go products support a USB interface using the USB-HID protocol, and a Bluetooth LE interface. Transactions, configuration, firmware updates, and key injection can all be performed using these interface types. Use of any method not listed in this security policy will invalidate the device’s PCI PTS approval.

    The device requires Bluetooth LE hosts to use version 4.2 or higher and use LE Security Mode 1 Level 4 (Secure Connections) only. “Just Works” cannot be used at any time. The device does not support or allow for the use of insecure communication options such as, but not limited to, LE Security Mode 2, and levels 1, 2, and 3 of LE Security Mode 1 and the “Just Works” secure pairing option of Security Mode 1.

    DynaFlex II Go products ship from the factory fully secure. The devices have no configuration settings that require modification by the user to meet PCI security requirements.

    DynaFlex II SCR Video

    Appendix D - Warranty, Standards, and Certifications

    MagTek warrants that the products sold pursuant to this Agreement will perform in accordance with MagTek’s published specifications. This warranty shall be provided only for a period of one year from the date of the shipment of the product from MagTek (the “Warranty Period”). This warranty shall apply only to the “Buyer” (the original purchaser, unless that entity resells the product as authorized by MagTek, in which event this warranty shall apply only to the first repurchaser).

    During the Warranty Period, should this product fail to conform to MagTek’s specifications, MagTek will, at its option, repair or replace this product at no additional charge except as set forth below. Repair parts and replacement products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new. All replaced parts and products become the property of MagTek. This limited warranty does not include service to repair damage to the product resulting from accident, disaster, unreasonable use, misuse, abuse, negligence, or modification of the product not authorized by MagTek. MagTek reserves the right to examine the alleged defective goods to determine whether the warranty is applicable.

    Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, MagTek specifically disclaims any liability or warranty for goods resold in other than MagTek’s original packages, and for goods modified, altered, or treated without authorization by MagTek.

    Service may be obtained by delivering the product during the warranty period to MagTek (1710 Apollo Court, Seal Beach, CA 90740). If this product is delivered by mail or by an equivalent shipping carrier, the customer agrees to insure the product or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit, to prepay shipping charges to the warranty service location, and to use the original shipping container or equivalent. MagTek will return the product, prepaid, via a three (3) day shipping service. A Return Material Authorization (“RMA”) number must accompany all returns. Buyers may obtain an RMA number by contacting MagTek Support Services at (562) 546-6800.

    Handling and Storage

    Upon receiving the device, inspect it to make sure it originated from an authentic source and has not been tampered with. For details, see D998200593 DynaFlex II Go Device Inspection Document, available from MagTek.

    From device delivery through assembly, shipping, installation, usage, and maintenance, the device must not be exposed to conditions outside the ratings in Appendix A Technical Specifications.

    If the device is exposed to cold temperatures, adjust it to warmer temperatures gradually to avoid condensation, which can interfere with the operation of the device or cause permanent damage. Do not drop or shake the device.

    For information about ongoing maintenance of the device, such as cleaning, see section 8 Maintenance.

    DynaFlex II Go products implement active tamper detection, which uses a small amount of electricity even when the device is completely powered off. When unpowered by an external power supply, the device powers its active tamper detection circuitry using its non-rechargeable internal backup battery. This provides 5 years of backup shelf life across the entire life of the device. If the backup battery is allowed to completely discharge, the device’s tamper detection engages and locks down the device, and it must be returned to the manufacturer to reset.

    To avoid accidental tamper events and to optimally condition the battery, follow these precautions:

    Maintenance

    Periodic cleaning of the device’s exterior may be required. To clean the outside of DynaProx products, wipe down the device with a soft, slightly damp cloth and then wipe dry with a lint-free cloth. The glass on the face can also be cleaned using a slightly damp specialty cleaning cloth, like those used to wipe lenses, monitors, and smartphone displays.

    In addition to the security guidance in the product manuals, MagTek may provide updates to this document, as well as supplemental security guidance or notices regarding vulnerabilities, at MagTek advises checking the product’s home page periodically for the most up-to-date information.

    Any firmware updates addressing product features, bugs, or security vulnerabilities are also posted to or may be sent directly to affected customers. To update the device’s firmware:

    1. Obtain the firmware image to install.

    2) Download from the MagTek web site.

    Inspection, Handling and Storage

    Before unpacking the device, it is important to inspect its secure packaging to make sure it has not been tampered with in storage or in transit. MagTek provides details for inspecting the integrity of the device’s secure packaging in DynaFlex II PED Package Inspection.

    It is important to inspect a new device regularly and thoroughly before deployment and a device in live usage (including its immediate surroundings), to make sure malicious individuals have not tampered with it or its surroundings. MagTek recommends conducting inspection training for all device operators and an inspection schedule with checkpoints in place to make sure operators are performing inspections as specified and as scheduled. MagTek provides easy-to-follow

    Upon receiving the device, inspect it to make sure it originated from an authentic source and has not been tampered with.

    From device delivery through assembly, shipping, installation, usage, and maintenance, the device must not be exposed to conditions outside the ratings in Appendix A Technical Specifications.

    If the device is exposed to cold temperatures, adjust it to warmer temperatures gradually to avoid condensation, which can interfere with the operation of the device or cause permanent damage. Do not drop or shake the device.

    For information about ongoing maintenance of the device, such as cleaning, see section 5 Maintenance.

    Account Data Key

    · DKPTM7-FK

    16 bytes for TDEA and AES- 128

    32 bytes for AES-256

    AES and TDEA DUKPT (ANS X9.24-3)

    Encrypt and MAC Account Data

    Firmware Protection Key

    · Firmware Signing Key (FSK)

    256 bytes

    RSA2048 and SHA-256

    Checks integrity and authenticity of firmware

    Temperature is the most critical factor in extending battery life and preserving battery charge. Store the device at the lowest reasonable temperatures within its specified storage temperature range (see Appendix A Technical Specifications). Storing at temperatures between -4°F to 113°F (-20°C to 45°C).

  • Do not drop or shake the device.

  • Do not attempt to disassemble the device.

  • Proper handling of the device throughout delivery, assembly, shipping, installation, usage, and maintenance is very important. Not following the guidelines in this document could damage the device, render it inoperable, and/or violate the conditions of the warranty.

    Handling to Avoid Damage

    Handling to Avoid Accidental Tamper

    Sensor

    Low Threshold Value

    High Threshold Value

    Internal Voltage

    1.60V ± 0.055V

    3.775V ± 0.1V

    Temperature

    -45°C ± 15°C

    Installation

    Environmental Conditions

    Communications and Security Protocols

    Configuration Settings

    120°C ± 10°C

    DynaFlex II products implement active tamper detection, which uses a small amount of electricity even when the device is completely powered off. The device primarily powers its active tamper detection circuitry using its rechargeable battery to back up the coin cell. Devices with a rechargeable battery ship with the battery charged to between 45% and 65%, which provides a shelf life of up to 10 years.

    However, if the rechargeable battery completely discharges or the device does not contain a rechargeable battery, the device continues to power its active tamper detection circuitry using its non-rechargeable backup battery, which provides an additional 5 years of backup shelf life across the entire life of the device but does not recharge. If the rechargeable battery and the backup battery are both allowed to completely discharge, the device’s tamper detection engages and locks down the device, and it must be returned to the manufacturer to reset.

    To avoid accidental tamper events and to optimally condition the battery, follow these precautions:

    • Temperature is the most critical factor in extending battery life and preserving battery charge. Store the device at the lowest reasonable temperatures within its specified storage temperature range (see Appendix A Technical Specifications). Storing below 77°F / 25°C is optimal.

    • Fully charge the device immediately upon receipt to extend its shelf life (see section 4.6.3 How to Charge the Battery).

    • Before storing the device, charge the battery to less than 100% (60% is optimal).

    • Before storing the device, power it off completely. See section 4.6.4 How to Power On / Wake Up from Standby Mode / Power Off.

    • When stored, charge the device for one hour every 6 months to keep the battery chemistry in optimal condition and to ensure it does not completely discharge.

    • Do not drop or shake the device.

    CAUTION: Proper handling of the device throughout delivery, assembly, shipping, installation, usage, and maintenance is very important. Not following the guidelines in this document could damage the device, render it inoperable, and/or violate the conditions of the warranty.

    Inspection

    Handling to Avoid Damage

    device inspection references.

    Handling to Avoid Accidental Tamper

    3) Follow the instructions in
    included in the firmware update utility’s Docs subfolder.

    Mechanical Maintenance

    Caution: DO NOT use liquid cleaning products or insert any other objects into the device.

    DO NOT apply any liquid directly onto the device, to avoid seepage into the electronics.

    Updates to Firmware, Documentation, Security Guidance

    developer.magtek.com,
    developer.magtek.com,
    DynaFlex, DynaFlex II, DynaProx Utility
    DynaFlex, DynaProx Firmware Update Utility Manual

    Purpose

    This document addresses the proper use of iDynamo 5 Gen III secure card readers (SCR), in a secure manner. This includes information about key-management responsibilities, administrative responsibilities, device functionality, identification, and environmental requirements.

    The use of this secure card reader in any method not described in this security policy will invalidate the PCI PTS POI v6.2 approval of the device.

    Throughout this document:

    • iDynamo 5 Gen III refers to all products in the iDynamo 5 Gen III product family.

    EACH BUYER UNDERSTANDS THAT THIS MAGTEK PRODUCT IS OFFERED AS-IS. MAGTEK MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND MAGTEK DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OF ANY OTHER KIND, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

    IF THIS PRODUCT DOES NOT CONFORM TO MAGTEK’S SPECIFICATIONS, THE SOLE REMEDY SHALL BE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED ABOVE. MAGTEK’S LIABILITY, IF ANY, SHALL IN NO EVENT EXCEED THE TOTAL AMOUNT PAID TO MAGTEK UNDER THIS AGREEMENT. IN NO EVENT WILL MAGTEK BE LIABLE TO THE BUYER FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE, SUCH PRODUCT, EVEN IF MAGTEK HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY.

    LIMITATION ON LIABILITY

    EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THE SECTIONS RELATING TO MAGTEK’S LIMITED WARRANTY, MAGTEK’S LIABILITY UNDER THIS AGREEMENT IS LIMITED TO THE CONTRACT PRICE OF THIS PRODUCT.

    MAGTEK MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS MAY BE STATED IN THIS AGREEMENT, AND MAGTEK DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

    MAGTEK SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR CONTINGENT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY. MAGTEK FURTHER LIMITS ITS LIABILITY OF ANY KIND WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE ON ITS PART, TO THE CONTRACT PRICE FOR THE GOODS.

    MAGTEK’S SOLE LIABILITY AND BUYER’S EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES ARE STATED IN THIS SECTION AND IN THE SECTION RELATING TO MAGTEK’S LIMITED WARRANTY.

    This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

    Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

    • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

    • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

    • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

    • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

    This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.

    Le présent appareil numérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la classe B prescrites dans le Réglement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le ministère des Communications du Canada.

    This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

    Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conformé à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

    This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

    Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.

    This product is recognized per Underwriter Laboratories and Canadian Underwriter Laboratories 1950.

    Testing for compliance with CE requirements was performed by an independent laboratory. The unit under test was found compliant with standards established for Class B devices.

    Hereby, MagTek Inc. declares that the radio equipment types Wideband Transmission System (802.11 wireless and Bluetooth® Low Energy), and Non-Specific Short Range Device (contactless) are in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declarations of conformity is available at the following internet addresses:

    · https://www.magtek.com/Content/DocumentationFiles/D998200650.pdf

    Hereby, MagTek Inc. declares that the radio equipment types Wideband Transmission System (802.11 wireless and Bluetooth® Low Energy), and Non-Specific Short Range Device (contactless) are in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declarations of conformity is available at the following internet address:

    · https://www.magtek.com/Content/DocumentationFiles/D998200651.pdf

    Testing for compliance with AS/NZS standards was performed by a registered and accredited laboratory. Per Subclause 53(4) of Part 15 of Schedule 5 to the General Equipment Rules, DynaFlex II GO meets the requirements of the Short-Range Equipment Standard as tested in EN 300 330 V2.1.1 (2017-02). The AS declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:

    · https://www.magtek.com/Content/DocumentationFiles/D998200700.pdf

    When ordered as RoHS compliant, this product meets the Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EEE) Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive (EU) 2015/863 amending Annex II to Directive 2011/65/EU. The marking is clearly recognizable, either as written words like “Pb-free,” “lead-free,” or as another clear symbol ( ).

    PCI Security Standards Council, LLC (“PCI SSC”) has approved this PIN Transaction Security Device to be in compliance with PCI SSC’s PIN Security Requirements.

    When granted, PCI SSC approval is provided by PCI SSC to ensure certain security and operational characteristics important to the achievement of PCI SSC’s goals, but PCI SSC approval does not under any circumstances include any endorsement or warranty regarding the functionality, quality or performance of any particular product or service. PCI SSC does not warrant any products or services provided by third parties. PCI SSC approval does not under any circumstances include or imply any product warranties from PCI SSC, including, without limitation, any implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for purpose, or non-infringement, all of which are expressly disclaimed by PCI SSC. All rights and remedies regarding products and services which have received PCI SSC approval shall be provided by the party providing such products or services, and not by PCI SSC.

    This product has been tested to IEC 62368-1 -Audio/Video, information and communication technology equipment - Part 1: General Requirements and U.S. (UL 62368-1), Canadian, Australian & New Zealand National Deviations by an ISO 17025 Accredited Testing Laboratory.

    This document is written specifically to work in conjunction with these safety and integrity features to protect the user and the device. It is very important to follow all steps in the product documentation carefully, in the order in which they are described, and at the recommended times. Failure to do so could result in personal injury, and / or cause damage to the device, and / or void the product warranty.

    IMPORTANT: YOU SHOULD CAREFULLY READ ALL THE TERMS, CONDITIONS AND RESTRICTIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT BEFORE INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE. YOUR INSTALLATION OF THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE PRESUMES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS, CONDITIONS, AND RESTRICTIONS CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THESE TERMS, CONDITIONS, AND RESTRICTIONS, PROMPTLY RETURN THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE AND ASSOCIATED DOCUMENTATION TO THE ADDRESS IN THIS DOCUMENT, ATTENTION: CUSTOMER SUPPORT.

    TERMS, CONDITIONS, AND RESTRICTIONS

    MagTek, Incorporated (the "Licensor") owns and has the right to distribute the described software and documentation, collectively referred to as the "Software."

    LICENSE: Licensor grants you (the "Licensee") the right to use the Software in conjunction with MagTek products. LICENSEE MAY NOT COPY, MODIFY, OR TRANSFER THE SOFTWARE IN WHOLE OR IN PART EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS AGREEMENT. Licensee

    may not decompile, disassemble, or in any other manner attempt to reverse engineer the Software. Licensee shall not tamper with, bypass, or alter any security features of the software or attempt to do so.

    TRANSFER: Licensee may not transfer the Software or license to the Software to another party without the prior written authorization of the Licensor. If Licensee transfers the Software without authorization, all rights granted under this Agreement are automatically terminated.

    COPYRIGHT: The Software is copyrighted. Licensee may not copy the Software except for archival purposes or to load for execution purposes. All other copies of the Software are in violation of this Agreement.

    TERM: This Agreement is in effect as long as Licensee continues the use of the Software. The Licensor also reserves the right to terminate this Agreement if Licensee fails to comply with any of the terms, conditions, or restrictions contained herein. Should Licensor terminate this Agreement due to Licensee's failure to comply, Licensee agrees to return the Software to Licensor. Receipt of returned Software by the Licensor shall mark the termination.

    LIMITED WARRANTY: Licensor warrants to the Licensee that the disk(s) or other media on which the Software is recorded are free from defects in material or workmanship under normal use.

    THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS. LICENSOR MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

    Because of the diversity of conditions and hardware under which the Software may be used, Licensor does not warrant that the Software will meet Licensee specifications or that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or free of errors.

    IN NO EVENT WILL LICENSOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE, OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE. Licensee's sole remedy in

    the event of a defect in material or workmanship is expressly limited to replacement of the Software disk(s) if applicable.

    GOVERNING LAW: If any provision of this Agreement is found to be unlawful, void, or unenforceable, that provision shall be removed from consideration under this Agreement and will not affect the enforceability of any of the remaining provisions. This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of California and shall inure to the benefit of MagTek, Incorporated, its successors or assigns.

    ACKNOWLEDGMENT: LICENSEE ACKNOWLEDGES THAT LICENSEE HAS READ THIS AGREEMENT, UNDERSTANDS ALL OF ITS TERMS, CONDITIONS, AND RESTRICTIONS, AND AGREES TO BE BOUND BY THEM. LICENSEE ALSO AGREES THAT THIS AGREEMENT SUPERSEDES ANY AND ALL VERBAL AND WRITTEN COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN LICENSOR AND LICENSEE OR THEIR ASSIGNS RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS AGREEMENT.

    QUESTIONS REGARDING THIS AGREEMENT SHOULD BE ADDRESSED IN WRITING TO MAGTEK, INCORPORATED, ATTENTION: CUSTOMER SUPPORT, AT THE ADDRESS LISTED IN THIS DOCUMENT, OR E-MAILED TO SUPPORT@MAGTEK.COM.

    DEMO SOFTWARE / SAMPLE CODE: Unless otherwise stated, all demo software and sample code are to be used by Licensee for demonstration purposes only and MAY NOT BE incorporated into any production or live environment. The PIN Pad sample implementation is for software PIN Pad test purposes only and is not PCI compliant. To meet PCI compliance in production or live environments, a third-party PCI compliant component (hardware or software-based) must be used.

    LIMITED WARRANTY

    FCC INFORMATION

    Caution: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by MagTek could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.

    CANADIAN DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

    INDUSTRY CANADA (IC) RSS

    CUR/UR

    CE STANDARDS

    EU STATEMENT

    UKCA STATEMENT

    AUSTRALIA / NEW ZEALAND STATEMENT

    ROHS STATEMENT

    PCI STATEMENT

    SAFETY

    SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

    Never do any of the following:

    • DO NOT use a ground adapter plug to connect equipment to a power socket-outlet that lacks a ground connection terminal.

    • DO NOT attempt any maintenance function that is not specifically described in this manual or in other ExpressCard 3000 instructional documents published by MagTek.

    SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

    Product Catalogs

    Brochures

    Description

    DynaFlex II PED products are ready to launch your payment, banking, and access environment to the next level. DynaFlex II PED devices deliver a smart solution with great flexibility, in a small form factor.

    This comprehensive catalog introduces MagTek as a leading manufacturer of secure electronic systems, including card readers, encrypting check scanners, PIN pads, and credential personalization systems.

    Purpose

    This document addresses the proper use of the DynaFlex II Go family of secure card readers (SCR) in a secure manner. This includes information about key-management responsibilities, administrative responsibilities, device functionality, identification, and environmental requirements.

    The use of this secure card reader in any method not described in this security policy will invalidate the PCI PTS POI v6.2 approval of the device.

    Throughout this document:

    • DynaFlex II Go products refers to all products in the DynaFlex II Go product family, including DynaFlex II Go models equipped with a barcode reader (BCR) and Bluetooth LE connectivity.

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email:

    Developing Custom Software

    Custom host software uses the same underlying device command set for all DynaFlex II product connection types. This section provides high-level information about communicating with the device via the various physical connection types in various software development frameworks, and provides pointers to available SDKs, which include sample code. Product documentation and SDKs are available for download by searching for the product name on and navigating to the tab.

    MagTek provides convenient SDKs and corresponding documentation for many programming languages and operating systems. The API libraries included in the SDKs wrap the details of the connection in an interface that conceptually parallels the device’s internal operation, freeing software developers to focus on the business logic, without having to deal with the complexities of platform APIs for connecting to the various available connection types, communicating using the various available protocols, and parsing the various available data formats. Information about using MagTek wrapper APIs is available in separate documentation, including:

    • MagTek Universal SDK Programmer’s Manual (Microsoft .NET)

    DynaFlex II SCR

    DynaFlex II SCR is a compact secure card reader authenticator that accepts magstripe, EMV contact, EMV contactless, and NFC mobile-wallet transactions — with optional barcode reading — for retail, hospitality, healthcare, and kiosk environments. It connects to Android and Windows hosts over USB and meets PCI PTS 6.x SCR/SRED requirements. Download brochures and spec sheets below.

    Power On via USB Cable LED Behavior

    DynaFlex II Go will power on immediately when connected to USB power. A brief beep will sound, and all four LEDs will turn on for half a second, as shown in the Figure below. Following this, LED 1 and LED 2 will remain illuminated, while LED 3 and LED 4 will remain unlit.

    Figure – LED Power on Sequence – USB Power On

    DynaProx Video

    DynaFamily (MMS Dyna Devices)

    Find downloadable software for MagTek's DynaFamily of MMS Dyna devices — SDKs, demo and sample apps, configuration utilities, and enterprise management tools. Choose a device below to see its full set of development and management resources.

    DO NOT remove any of the covers or guards that are fastened with screws. There are no user-serviceable areas within these covers.

  • DO NOT override or “cheat” electrical or mechanical interlock devices.

  • DO NOT use EC3000 supplies or cleaning materials for other than their intended purposes.

  • DO NOT operate the equipment if you or anyone else have noticed unusual noises or odors.

  • Consider the following before operating the ExpressCard 3000:

    • Connect the EC3000 to a properly grounded AC power socket-outlet. If in doubt, have the socket-outlet checked by a qualified electrician. Improper connection of the device’s grounding conductor creates a risk of electric shock.

    • Place the EC3000 on a solid surface that can safely support the device’s weight plus the weight of a person leaning against it (such as a service technician).

    • Be careful when moving or relocating the device. Use proper lifting techniques.

    • Use materials and supplies specifically designed for MagTek devices. Using unsuitable materials may result in poor performance, and in some cases may be hazardous.

    📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)
  • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

  • Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation! feedback@magtek.com

    support@magtek.com
    MagTek Universal SDK Programmer’s Manual (Microsoft C++ )
  • MagTek Universal SDK Programmer’s Manual (Java)

  • MagTek Universal SDK Programmer’s Manual (Android)

  • The documentation is bundled with the SDKs themselves, which include:

    • MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices (Windows)

    • MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices (Android)

    The SDKs and corresponding documentation include:

    • Functions for sending the direct commands described in this manual.

    • Wrappers for commonly used commands that further simplify development.

    • Sample source code to demonstrate how to communicate with the device using the direct commands described in this manual.

    To download the SDKs and documentation, go to Universal SDK Documentation for the programming languages and platforms you need or contact MagTek Support Services for assistance.

    In addition to the SDK API libraries, software developers also have the option to revert to direct communication with the device using libraries using the operating system’s native USB or TCP/IP. For example, custom software written in Visual Basic or Visual C++ may make API calls to the standard Windows USB HID driver. For more information about sending commands directly, see DynaFamily Programmer’s Manual.

    For more information about developing custom applications that integrate with DynaFlex II, see the MagTek web site or contact your reseller or MagTek Support Services.

    developer.magtek.com
    Downloads, Compliance & Marketing Materials

    Maintenance

    Mechanical Maintenance

    DO NOT use liquid cleaning products or insert any other objects into the device.

    DO NOT apply any liquid directly onto the device, to avoid seepage into the electronics.

    Periodic cleaning of the device’s exterior may be required. To clean the outside of DynaFlex II Go products, wipe down the device with a soft, slightly damp cloth and then wipe dry with a lint-free cloth. The graphic overlay on the face of the device can also be cleaned using a slightly damp specialty cleaning cloth, like those used to wipe lenses, monitors, and smartphone displays.

    Updates to Firmware, Documentation, Security Guidance

    In addition to the security guidance in the product manuals, MagTek may provide updates to this document, as well as supplemental security guidance or notices regarding vulnerabilities, at www.magtek.com. MagTek advises checking the product’s home page periodically for the most up-to-date information.

    Any firmware updates addressing product features, bugs, or security vulnerabilities are also posted to www.magtek.com or may be sent directly to affected customers. To update the device’s firmware:

    • Obtain the firmware image to install from your MagTek representative.

    • Download 1000007406 DynaFlex, DynaProx Test Utility from the MagTek web site.

    • Follow the instructions in D998200402 DynaFlex, DynaProx Utility User Manual (Windows) included in the firmware update utility’s Docs subfolder.

    A collection of short videos designed to give you an overview of the DynaFlex II SCR product, how to use it, and the features it offers.

    Reference Section

    Information Available

    Product Catalogs

    These catalogs highlights the DynaFlex II SCR, a secure card reader authenticator in a small form factor that is ready to accept tap, swipe, and dip payments in a wide variety of retail environments.

    Marketing Materials

    For more help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email:

    The essential software resources for developing with and managing the DynaFlex II PED PIN-entry reader.

    The essential software resources for developing with and managing the DynaFlex II Go secure card reader.

    The essential software resources for developing with and managing the DynaProx contactless reader.

    Reference Section

    Information Available

    DynaFlex II SCR

    The essential software resources for developing with and managing the DynaFlex II SCR countertop secure card reader.

    Downloadable Software

    Need More Help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email:

    Dyna Devices - DynaFlex and DynaProx Family

    This brochure details the MagTek Dyna family of devices that bring a new level of security to your point-of-sale platform with dynamic authentication, encryption, and tokenization.

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    • 📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)

    • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

    Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    DynaFlex II PED Brochure
    Product Catalog: MagTek Hardware, Magensa Services, and Qwantum Security

    Card Reading

    About Reading Cards

    The steps for starting a transaction and reading a contactless payment device are different depending on the device’s configuration and on the design of the host software. Host software developers should see section 9 Developing Custom Software for implementation references. The solution developer should provide solution-specific instructions for operators to follow. A transaction generally follows this essential flow:

    • An advanced operator has already made sure DynaFlex II Go is configured properly and is connected to the host (see section 4.3 Connecting DynaFlex II Go to a Host). When the device is connected to the host and powered via the USB-C connector or internal rechargeable battery, the host software may keep a connection open to the device.

    • The operator makes sure DynaFlex II Go is receiving power either from the USB connection, or from the internal rechargeable battery, and is awake and powered on (see section 7.8.3)

    • The operator uses the host software’s user interface (for example, a point of sale) to finalize a transaction amount, then initiates a transaction. In solutions that are designed to respond to cardholder input events that occur when the device is idle, such as unprompted tapping of a card or electronic payment device, the host software may respond to those inputs by notifying the host. The host software may trigger other operations without being initiated by an operator (for example, the host software may immediately start a transaction, or alert the cardholder or operator to take action).

    • The host communicates with the device, and reports to the operator when the device is ready.

    • The operator guides and assists the cardholder in presenting payment.

    • The cardholder interacts with the device to present payment. The following sections provide additional details about presenting each of the available payment methods.

    • The host monitors the progress of the transaction, and when necessary, and should report issues to the operator, who may need to relay the messages to the cardholder.

    • The device reports the success or failure of the transaction to the cardholder and to the host.

    To tap a contactless card or smartphone, follow these steps:

    • Check LED status:

      • The device shows the transaction status using the LEDs. LED1 lights solid and all other LEDs are off, per EMV standards, to indicate it is ready for a tap.

      • All devices report detailed transaction status to the host, and host software may report that information to operators so they can guide cardholders through the transaction (for example, “please tap your card now”).

    • If the cardholder is using an electronic payment device, such as a smartphone, make sure the payment device has NFC turned On and has a payment app configured to process transactions. For details, see the documentation provided by the smartphone manufacturer and payment app publisher.

    Figure - Tapping a Contactless Card / Smartphone

    Figure – Contactless Read LED Sequence – Read Complete (Connected via Bluetooth® LE)

    To scan a barcode, follow these steps:

    • Make sure you are using a DynaFlex II Go model that includes a barcode reader, indicated by QR Code markings on the face of the device surrounding the barcode reader lens (see section 1.1 Key Features and Components).

    • If the barcode being scanned is not on a self-illuminated source such as a smartphone, make sure there is enough ambient light for the camera to read the barcode. In low light conditions, the barcode reader will only be able to read self-illuminated sources.

    • In some solutions, the operator may have to perform an operation in the host software to enable the barcode reader, or to start a transaction with the barcode reader enabled.

    DynaFlex II Go products support Apple Value Added Services (Apple VAS) protocol.

    Contactless transactions using the Apple VAS protocol permits the device reader to perform the following supported operations:

    The device reads both Apple VAS data and EMV payment data from a tapped smartphone or reads EMV payment data from a tapped card. When device sends ARQC to the host to conclude the transaction, it includes EMV payment data in container FC and includes VAS data, if available, in container FE

    The device reads only Apple VAS data from a tapped smartphone and does not read data from a tapped card. If the tapped smartphone does not support VAS, the device does not detect or read from the smartphone. When the device sends ARQC to conclude the transaction, it includes VAS data in container FE and does not include EMV payment data in container FC.

    The device reads only Apple VAS data from a tapped smartphone or reads EMV payment data from a tapped card. When the device sends ARQC to conclude the transaction, it only includes either EMV payment data in container FC for cards, or includes VAS data in container for smartphones.

    The device operates the same as EMV mode (01). It reads only EMV payment data from a tapped smartphone or a tapped card. When the device sends ARQC to conclude the transaction, it includes EMV payment data in container FC and does not include VAS data in container FE. Note: THIS MODE MAY NOT BE NEEDED.

    For details, see D998200597 DynaFlex II Go Programmer’s Manual (COMMANDS).

    1.1.1 How to Tap Contactless NFC Tags / MIFARE Classic / MIFARE DESFire /MIFARE Plus Cards and Send Pass-through Commands

    DynaFlex II Go is compatible with near field communication (NFC) technology such as MIFARE Classic/MIFARE DESFire /MIFARE Plus contactless IC products (smart cards).

    To tap an NFC Contactless IC product and send pass-through commands, follow these steps:

    • Check LED status:

      • Per EMV standards, the device indicates transaction status through its LED indicators, located on the front face of the device. When ready for a tap, LED 1 is steadily illuminated while all other LEDs remain unlit.

      • All devices communicate transaction details to the host. The host software will relay this information to operators, allowing them to direct cardholders during the transaction, such as prompting "please tap your card now".

    Appendix B: Barcode Reader Symbologies

    A Barcode symbology refers to the way in which data is encoded in a barcode. It uses either spaced lines, dots or squares. When read, these symbols are decoded and converted to data. The table below lists all of the supported symbologies and which are enabled by default.

    Barcode Reader Supported Symbologies

    Symbology

    Default

    AIM 128

    LED Behavior: Successful Transactions

    BCR Payment Transaction Successful (Connected via USB)

    When the operator presses the Start button on the host device, LED 1,2, and the BCR status light will be illuminated see the Figure below. When a barcode is detected, only LED 1 will remain illuminated, the BCR status LED will be off, and a long beep will sound see the next Figure.

    Figure – BCR Transaction USB Ready State

    Figure – BCR Transaction Barcode Detected (Connected via USB)

    MSR Payment Transaction Successful (Connected via USB)

    When the operator presses the Start transaction button on the host device, LED 1 and 2 will remain on. When a card is swiped, LEDs 1,2 and 4 will turn on in sequence (1,2 then 4), followed by a long beep, indicating a successful transaction, see the Figure below. After a successful transaction, the device will return to the ready state, see the next Figure.

    Figure – LED Sequence – Payment Transaction Successful MSR Swipe (Connected via USB)

    Figure – Return to Ready State After Successful Transaction

    When the operator presses the Start transaction button on the host device, LED 1 and 2 will remain on. When a card is inserted, LEDs 1, 2 and 4 will turn on in sequence, followed by a long beep, indicating a successful transaction, see Figure 7-20 – LED Sequence – Payment Transaction Successful EMV Contact (Connected via USB). LED 4 will remain on, and the device will sound a double beep until the card is removed from the slot. After a successful transaction, the device will return to the ready state, see Figure 7-19.

    Figure – LED Sequence – Payment Transaction Successful EMV Contact (Connected via USB)

    When the operator presses the Start transaction button on the host device, LED 1 will remain on. When a card is presented within range of the contactless reader, LEDs 1,2,3, and 4 will turn on in sequence, followed by a long beep, indicating a successful transaction, see Figure 7-21 - LED Sequence – Payment Transaction Successful EMV Contactless (Connected via USB). After a successful transaction, the device will return to the ready state, see Figure 7-19.

    Figure - LED Sequence – Payment Transaction Successful EMV Contactless (Connected via USB)

    When the operator presses the button on the host device, LED 1,2, and the BCR status light will be illuminated see Figure 7-22. When a barcode is detected, only LED 1 will remain illuminated, the BCR status LED will be off, and a long beep will sound see Figure 7-23.

    Figure 7-22 – BCR Transaction Bluetooth® LE Ready State

    Figure – BCR Transaction Barcode Detected (Connected via Bluetooth® LE)

    When the operator presses the transaction button on the host device, LED 1 and 2 will remain on. When a card is swiped, LEDs 1,2 and 4 will turn on in sequence (1,2, then 4), followed by a long beep, indicating a successful transaction, see Figure 7-24. After a successful transaction, the device will return to the ready state, see Figure 7-25.

    Figure – LED Sequence – Payment Transaction Successful MSR Swipe (Connected via Bluetooth® LE)

    Figure – Return to Ready State After Successful Transaction (Bluetooth® LE Ready State)

    When the operator presses the transaction button on the host device, LED 1 and 2 will remain on. When a card is inserted, LEDs 1,2 and 4 will turn on in sequence, followed by a long beep, indicating a successful transaction, see Figure 7-26 - LED Sequence – Payment Transaction Successful EMV Contact (Connected via Bluetooth® LE). LED 4 will remain on and the device will sound a double beep until the card is removed from the slot. After a successful transaction, the device will return to the ready state, see Figure 7-25.

    Figure - LED Sequence – Payment Transaction Successful EMV Contact (Connected via Bluetooth® LE)

    When the operator presses the Start transaction button on the host device, LED 1 will remain on from ready state. When a card is presented within range of the contactless reader, LEDs 1,2,3, and 4 will turn on in sequence, followed by a long beep, indicating a successful transaction, see Figure 7-27. After a successful transaction, the device will return to the ready state, see Figure 7-25.

    Figure - LED Sequence – Payment Transaction Successful EMV Contactless (Connected via Bluetooth® LE)

    Planning and Preparation

    The guidelines in the following sections are intended to help project planners and system administrators plan for the physical and logical requirements of deploying and using DynaFlex II Go products. The most effective way to ensure smooth deployment of a solution is to consider these factors before receiving the device.

    Logistical Planning

    • Determine what type of host DynaFlex II Go will connect to. For a list of supported device types and operating systems, see Table - Available Models and Options. When planning, be sure to include any additional support or devices required by the host and DynaFlex II Go, such as physical locations, mounting, power connections, and charging cradles.

    • Determine what connection the host will use to communicate with the device. The available connections are USB-C for power and control and Bluetooth® Low Energy (LE) for wireless connectivity (see Table - Available Models and Options).

    • Determine what software will be installed on the host and how it will be configured. Software can include the operating system, transaction processing software, security software, and so on. If teams other than the software development team will be involved in preliminary device testing, MagTek recommends the solution development team provide a smoke test harness early in the development process to allow basic testing (for example, communication adapter testing). In addition, be sure to plan for any additional support required by the software, such as software licenses and network connections. Information about software is provided in section 4.2 About Host Software.

    • Determine how the device will be physically presented to the cardholder. If the device is mounted, make sure there is adequate clearance for cardholders to swipe, insert, and tap. If the solution design includes metal objects anywhere near the device, including metal enclosures, make sure that at all points the metal is no closer than 15mm from the MSR swipe path or card insertion slot. Proximity to metal can adversely affect the device’s performance.

    • Determine how the device should be configured and specify that configuration when ordering the device. A full list of configurable options is documented in D998200597 DynaFlex II Go Programmer’s Manual (COMMANDS).

    • Select and configure a secure workstation that advanced operators will use to configure and/or update the device. The workstation must be configured as follows:

      • Available USB port.

      • A secure means of obtaining files, either via the network (such as SFTP) or via removable media, such as USB flash drives. This is required for installing software tools, copying firmware files, etc. If you are using Magensa Services, make sure the secure workstation has an internet connection and has all the required Magensa Remote Services software components installed.

    • Determine the final set of tools advanced operators will use to configure, test, and update the device. This documentation uses the 1000007406 DynaFlex, DynaProx Test Utility as an example for configuring the device; it can be used for initial pre-deployment testing and development, and as sample code showing how to communicate with the device, but the full solution may call for customized, solution-specific software for configuring the device and updating firmware.

    • Determine how to inspect devices upon arrival, upon installation, and periodically during live usage, to ensure malicious individuals have not tampered with them. Details about inspection are provided in section 4.1 About Inspection.

    • Develop procedures for maintaining the device(s). Detailed guidance is provided in section 8 Maintenance.

    • Determine how to train operators. For example, training may include information extracted from section 5 Configuration, section 6 Operation, and section 8 Maintenance.

    • Review the device’s PCI Security Policy, posted to the PCI web site under Approved PIN Transaction Security (PTS) Devices, for additional information about using the device securely.

    PCI PTS POI Security Policy

    This document addresses the proper use of the DynaFlex II Go family of secure card readers (SCR) in a secure manner. This includes information about key-management responsibilities, administrative responsibilities, device functionality, identification, and environmental requirements.

    Policy Document ToC

    Reference Section

    Information Available

    Addresses the proper use of the DynaFlex II Go family of secure card readers (SCR) in a secure manner.

    DynaFlex II Go Manuals

    DynaFlex II Go is a compact secure card reader authenticator that accepts tap (NFC and EMV contactless), swipe (magnetic stripe), and dip (EMV contact chip) transactions, with an optional barcode reader for 1D/2D and QR codes. It connects over USB or Bluetooth® LE and is built for mobile, countertop, and kiosk deployments on Windows, Android, and iOS. The guides below cover everything you need to install and operate the device.

    Operation Manuals

    Reference Section

    Information Available

    A short get-started reference for unpacking, connecting, and powering on DynaFlex II Go — the fastest path to a working device.

    DynaProx Manuals

    DynaProx is MagTek's rugged, contactless-only reader, combining the controller and NFC antenna in a compact sealed housing. It accepts EMV Contactless and NFC Contactless transactions — including mobile wallets and MIFARE® credentials — with an optional barcode reader (DynaProx BCR) for 1D/2D codes. Rated IP66/IK08 for harsh indoor and outdoor conditions, it's designed for kiosks, unattended terminals, and countertop use over USB, USB iAP2, or RS-232. The guide below covers everything you need to install and operate the device.

    Operation Manuals

    Reference Section

    Information Available

    The complete reference for planning, installing, configuring, operating, and maintaining DynaProx, plus pointers for developers integrating the device.

    Need More Help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email:

    Downloadable Software

    This section holds links for non-firmware downloadable software for MagTek products, organized by device.

    Downloadable Software

    Reference Section

    Information Available

    Essential software resources for developing with and managing the DynaFamily group of secure card reader,

    Product Catalogs

    Brochures

    Description

    This brochure highlights the DynaFlex II Go, a secure card reader authenticator in a small form factor that is ready to accept tap, swipe, and dip payments in a wide variety of retail environments.

    DynaFlex II SCR

    blurb

    Device Inspection Document

    iDynamo 5 (Gen III) is a compact secure card reader authenticator (SCRA) that reads magnetic stripe cards that conform to ISO standards. iDynamo models are made for iOS, Android, and Windows devices equipped with a USB-C or Lightning interface. When a cardholder swipes a card, the device encrypts card data before they leave the encapsulated magnetic stripe reader head using the Triple Data Encryption Algorithm (TDEA, also known as Triple DES) and DUKPT key management.

    The exterior of the device is a a rubberrized plastic. Visually inspect the device for signs of tampering. There should be no evidence of loose wires or screws, misplaced labels, cracked casing, holes, or tool marks.

    • Front Face: Inspect the overall form factor for signs of tampering. The front face has an embossed MagTek lock.

    • TOP: The top of the device has a single LED and power button.

    DynaProx

    The DynaProx is a next-generation, EMV Contactless, and NFC Contactless reader from MagTek, designed for original equipment manufacturers (OEMs) and developers building secure payment, access control, and identification solutions. It combines the controller and antenna in a small form-factor, and is available in two models: the standard DynaProx for EMV Contactless, and NFC transactions, and the DynaProx BCR which includes a camera for reading 1D/2D barcodes. The device is engineered with the MagneSafe® Security Architecture, meeting requirements for contactless EMV 3.0 and PCI PTS POI 6.x, and supports triple DEA and AES-256 encryption with DUKPT key management to safeguard sensitive payment data.

    Beyond payments, DynaProx supports MIFARE® technology for access control, as well as Apple® VAS and Google SmartTap for mobile wallet protocols supporting event ticketing and loyalty programs. Ruggedized for unattended environments, it features IK08 impact resistance and IP66 water ingress protection, making it ideal for kiosks, vending machines, car washes, gas pumps, and countertop deployments with an optional stand. The device connects via USB, USB iAP2, or RS-232 interfaces, and is compatible with Windows, Linux, Android, and iOS applications. DynaProx is also ready for use with Magensa L3 certified gateway services. The official MagTek DynaProx support page is a central hub containing all the resources you'll need. There you can find product brochures, programmer's manuals for the MMS implementation, developer guides (including for EMV Common Kernel and L3 certification), a product catalog, and a comprehensive FAQ section with instructional videos.

    DynaFlex II Go

    The DynaFlex II Go is a PCI PTS v6.x certified Secure Card Reader Authenticator (SCRA) from MagTek, designed for mobility without compromising security. It features a compact, low-profile design and is ready to accept a wide range of payment types, including tap (contactless/NFC mobile wallets like Apple Pay, Google Pay, and Samsung Pay), swipe (magnetic stripe), and dip (EMV chip cards). The optional BCR model adds the ability to scan both 1D and 2D barcodes, and it also supports reading and writing non-payment NFC data for use in access control, loyalty, and transit ticketing applications.

    The device offers flexible connectivity via USB-C or Bluetooth® LE, works across Windows, Android, and iOS hosts, and is backed by MagTek’s MagneSafe® Security Architecture, including AES encryption and DUKPT key management. The official MagTek DynaFlex II Go support page is a central hub containing all the resources you'll need. There you can find product brochures, compliance documentation (including device and package inspection guides), programmer’s manuals, SDKs, a comprehensive FAQ section, and instructional videos.

    DynaFlex II Go

    This compliance documentation page provides the essential security and inspection guides required to ensure the physical integrity of DynaFlex II Go secure card readers before and after deployment.

    Disabled

    Aztec

    Enabled

    Codabar

    Enabled

    Code 11

    Disabled

    Code128

    Enabled

    Code 32

    Disabled

    Code 39

    Enabled

    Code 93

    Disabled

    Data Matrix

    Enabled

    EAN-8

    Enabled

    EAN-13

    Enabled

    Febraban

    Disabled

    GSI-128 (UCC/EAN-128)

    Enabled

    GS1 Databar (RSS)

    Disabled

    Industrial 25

    Disable

    Interleaved 2 of 5,

    Enabled

    ISSN

    Disabled

    ISBN

    Disabled

    ITF-14

    Disabled

    ITF-6

    Disabled

    Matrix 2 of 5

    Enabled

    Micro QR

    Disabled

    MSI Plessey

    Disabled

    PDF417

    Enabled

    Plessey

    Disabled

    QR Code

    Enabled

    Standard 25

    Disabled

    UPC-E

    Enabled

    UPC-A

    Enabled

    feedback@magtek.com
    1000007406 DynaFlex, DynaProx Test Utility installed, which advanced operators can use to configure and test the device.
    www.pcisecuritystandards.org
    📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)
  • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

  • Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation! feedback@magtek.com

    Video Page
    support@magtek.com
    📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)
  • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

  • Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation! feedback@magtek.com

    DynaFlex II PED
    DynaFlex II Go
    DynaProx
    support@magtek.com
    📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)
  • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

  • Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation! feedback@magtek.com

    Installation & Operation Manual
    support@magtek.com
  • Briefly hold the card, smartphone, or other contactless payment device over the contactless landing zone, indicated by the EMVCo Contactless Indicator symbol on the device’s face (see Figure 7-28). Because each smartphone model may have its NFC antenna placed differently, the ideal tap position may vary by make and model. For example, Samsung users may need to center the phone on the contactless landing zone, while Apple users may need to tap the top of the phone on the contactless landing zone.

  • Wait for LED status:

    • The device quickly lights the second LED to show it is processing, then lights the third LED to show it has successfully read the tap, then lights the fourth LED to show the read is complete (see Figure 7-29) The device then returns to Ready State, when connected to USB ready state is LED 1 and 2 on only, ready state for BLE is LED 1,2, and 3 on.

    • The device beeps once.

    • If the transaction requires a signature, the device sends a notification message to the host that includes the status Signature Capture Requested. In this case, the solution design collects the cardholder’s signature manually or via a different method.

    • The device ends the transaction and reports the transaction status to the host.

  • If the device cannot communicate with the card, smartphone, or other contactless payment device:

  • The device ends the transaction.

  • The device lights LED 4 for a short time.

  • The device beeps twice.

  • The device notifies the host that the transaction failed. If this occurs, the host software may choose to retry the transaction or revert to prompting the operator to perform another operation that is specific to the solution design.

  • Wait for the device, the host, or the operator to prompt for a barcode read:
    • The device lights the barcode reader indicator LED next to the barcode reader lens.

  • Hold the barcode in front of the barcode reader camera:

    • If possible, use the light from the barcode reader indicator LED to align the barcode within the barcode reader’s field of view, which extends 16 degrees above / below and 21 degrees to the left/right of a line perpendicular to the barcode reader lens.

    • Hold the barcode as close as 6 inches from the lens. For smaller barcodes, the device will read immediately. If it does not, gradually move away up to 14 inches from the lens until the device reports a successful read. Larger barcodes must be far enough away from the device that the whole barcode is within the camera’s field of view; if a large barcode is too close, the barcode reader can only see a zoomed in portion of the barcode.

    • Do not tilt the barcode more than 60 degrees from parallel to the device’s face.

  • Wait for the device or the host to report the barcode has been read successfully:

    • The device beeps once.

    • The device turns off the barcode reader indicator LED.

  • Place the card over the device's designated contactless landing zone, marked by the EMVCo Contactless Indicator symbol on the front face of the device.
  • Wait for LED status:

    • Initially, LED 2 illuminates, signaling the device is processing. The device subsequently illuminates LED 3 and LED 4, indicating card detection. Notifications are then sent to identify the card type and UID.

    • The Host application can further interact with the NFC Tag using pass-through commands. For details, see D998200597 DynaFlex II Go Programmer’s Manual (COMMANDS).

    • If the pass-through command is the last successful command, the device will end the transaction, emitting a single beep signaling a successful transaction. The user then needs to remove the card.

    • If an error is detected, the device will end the transaction and emit two beeps to signal the error. The user then needs to remove the card.

  • The device notifies the host that the transaction has ended with the NFC Tag removed.

  • How to Tap Contactless Cards / Devices

    How to Scan Barcodes

    Apple VAS for DynaFlex II Go

    VAS App and Payment Mode (Dual Mode)

    VAS App Only Mode (VAS Mode)

    VAS App or Payment Mode (Single Mode)

    Payment Only Mode (Payment Mode)

    EMV Contact Payment Transaction Successful (Connected via USB)

    EMV Contactless Payment Transaction Successful (Connected via USB)

    BCR Payment Transaction Successful (Connected via Bluetooth® LE)

    MSR Payment Transaction Successful (Connected via Bluetooth® LE)

    EMV Contact Payment Transaction Successful (Connected via Bluetooth® LE)

    EMV Contactless Payment Transaction Successful (Connected via Bluetooth® LE)

    An Android Software Development Kit that provides tools, a sample application, sample code, and documentation for developers creating solutions for MagTek MMS devices on Android hosts.

    Contains the necessary tools for software developers who want to create software solutions for MagTek devices to a Windows based host using Java Virtual Machine.

    A Linux-based SDK that includes sample applications, code, and documentation for building software solutions for MagTek MMS devices on Linux hosts.

    A Windows SDK that provides sample code, documentation, and a demo application to help developers integrate MagTek MMS devices into Windows-based host applications.

    Description

    Summary

    A full-featured Android browser designed for app development, enabling web apps to communicate with hardware without needing plugins, available on Google Play and the Amazon app store.

    A Windows application that automates the configuration and firmware updates for a wide range of MagTek readers, including all DynaFlex II models, across an enterprise deployment.

    Description

    Summary

    A configuration utility for a variety of DynaFlex and DynaProx devices used to change or update EMV configurations, run demo EMV transactions, upload bitmap images, and parse TLV data.

    A demo web page designed to illustrate the functionality of the MagneFlex Browser, which can be launched on Android, iOS, and Windows versions of the browser.

    The MagneFlex Browser is a full function browser this free development tool can be white-labelled and provides a turnkey integration solution for web applications, working with MagTek hardware and services. Sites developed in HTML 5 with device responsive views will work seamlessly in this browser allowing an app to respond to devices whether they are tablets or phones.

    Description

    Summary

    A full-function HTML browser application for Windows x64, featuring a developer mode for debugging JavaScript, improved HTML/framework rendering, and tabbed browsing.

    A full-function HTML browser application for Windows x86, featuring the same developer tools and modern rendering capabilities as the x64 version.

    Description

    Summary

    OID Converter Console (Web)

    A web console that accepts an OID and command data and returns the data to use for MTUSDK configuration commands on DynaFlex devices.

    BCR Utility for BCR Devices

    API/SDK

    A utility for demonstrating and testing barcode-reading operations on DynaFlex BCR and DynaProx BCR devices (models equipped with a barcode reader).

    Apps

    Demo Programs

    Magneflex Browser

    Need More Help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email:

    General Status LED: Power on the device and make sure that there is no indication that potential tampering was detected. After the device goes through the boot-up process, the LED should be solid green.

  • Bottom: A single USB-C receptacle is on the bottom of the device with certification and compliance logos as shown in the image.

  • Reader Left: There are 2 adapter sleeve retainer holes. There are no other components.

  • Reader Right: There are 2 adapter sleeve retainer holes. There are no other components.

  • Reader Back: The MagTek logo is debossed into the plastic and the product label in located on the bottom right.

  • Magnetic Swipe Path: Check the card insert slot. The reader has a smooth, unobstructed path. Insert an embossed card into the device to check for any signs of obstructions inside the card insertion slot. Other than the magnetic head that reads magnetic stripes there are no electronics, objects, or wires in the path.

  • Product Label: The product label is located on the back of the device. Check PN, SN and HW number. Serial Number matches serial number on boot-up. Check the product label on the device is complete, fully attached, with no signs of modification.Check the information (part #, model name, and serial number) on the label and ensure it matches the information found on the package and in any documents such as invoices.

  • Check shipping documents and tracking information to ensure that the shipment origin and sender information are correct. Check for evidence of tampering with the package containing this device. Before shipment, the box is sealed with tamper evident tape that will show VOID and OPENED if removed. The box and seal should be intact when initially received.

    Check all views of the device and compare to photos.

    It is helpful to do the following for your device inspection audit.

    • Have a list of the devices and details listed on the asset tag.

    • Take photos of the front, back, and sides of each device.

    Check device Part numbers, serial numbers and IDs and check physical connections. Report any suspected signs of tampering immediately.

    PCI Web Site: https://www.pcisecuritystandards. org/assessors_and_solutions/pin_transaction_devices.

    Search for MagTek and find the product name, oiDynamo 5 (Gen III), on the web page. Compare the Hardware # and Firmware #.

    Periodically inspect the following items while in use:

    • Card swipe path

    • Power Button

    • Form factor

    • LED

    • Label

    • USB-C receptacle

    IMPORTANT: Be certain to inspect this device before deployment and during its life-cycle.

    Overview

    Form Factor

    Shipment

    Checklist Summary

    Device Audit

    PCI compliance web page.

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email:

    Reference Section

    Information Available

    These catalogs highlights the DynaProx, a secure card reader authenticator in a small form factor that is ready to accept tap, swipe, and dip payments in a wide variety of retail environments.

    A collection of short videos designed to give you an overview of the DynaProx product, how to use it, and the features it offers.

    Marketing Materials

    For more help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email:

    These catalogs highlights the DynaFlex II Go, a secure card reader authenticator in a small form factor that is ready to accept tap, swipe, and dip payments in a wide variety of retail environments.

    A collection of short videos designed to give you an overview of the DynaFlex II Go product, how to use it, and the features it offers.

    Reference Section

    Marketing Materials

    Information Available

    For more help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email:

    This document addresses the proper use of the DynaFlex II Go family of secure card readers (SCR) in a secure manner.

    Reference Section

    Information Available

    Device Inspection Document

    A manual that outlines the step-by-step procedures for visually inspecting the DynaFlex II Go's hardware label, physical appearance, and tamper indicators to verify its authenticity and security before use.

    Package Inspection Document, Without Stand

    Applies to: DynaFlex II Go

    Documents

    A guide that details how to examine the device's secure packaging for signs of tampering during storage or transit, helping to ensure the reader has not been compromised before deployment.

    For more help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    General Description

    Name, appearance, and Identification

    Installation & User Guidance

    Inspection, installation, environmental conditions, security protocols, configuration settings.

    Operation & Maintenance

    Inspection, self-test, roles & responsibilities, Password & Certificates, Tamper Response, Patching & Updating, Decommissioning

    Security

    Account data protection, algorithms supported, Key Management, key loading, key replacement.

    Appendix A: References

    Acronyms

    For more help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    • 📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)

    • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

    Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    Purpose

    Installation & Operation Manual

    The complete reference for planning, installing, configuring, operating, and maintaining DynaFlex II Go, plus pointers for developers building custom software.

    Need More Help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    • 📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)

    • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

    Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    Quick Installation Guide

    Essential software resources for developing with and managing the oDynamo secure card reader,

    Need More Help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    • 📞 Phone: 1-800-788-6835 (US) | +1-562-546-6616 (International)

    • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 6:00 AM - 5:00 PM PST

    Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal:

    • 📚 Knowledge Base:

    • 💬 Developer Forum:

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    DynaFamily Devices
    oDynamo

    This comprehensive catalog introduces MagTek as a leading manufacturer of secure electronic systems, including card readers, encrypting check scanners, PIN pads, and credential personalization systems.

    Dyna Devices - DynaFlex and DynaProx Family

    This brochure details the MagTek Dyna family of devices that bring a new level of security to your point-of-sale platform with dynamic authentication, encryption, and tokenization.

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    • 📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)

    • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

    Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    DynaFlex II Go Brochure
    Product Catalog: MagTek Hardware, Magensa Services, and Qwantum Security

    About the Status LEDs

    DynaFlex II Go provides four LEDs (see section 7.1 Component Details), numbered LED1 through LED4, which report the device’s current operating status.

    • The meaning of each LED depends on the device’s operating mode, see section 6 Operation. Most of the time, operators will check the device’s status using the LEDs when it is in Active Mode while the device is not performing a transaction.

    • LED blinking patterns have specific meanings as described in Table 7-. A blinking LED generally means the device is actively doing something to change the state that the LED is indicating, and solid indicates a persistent state that would require an operator or cardholder to take action to change. One major exception is a device-wide functional failure state, such as a tamper state, where all LEDs flash urgently to call the attention of an advanced operator to intervene.

    In this manual, specific blinking patterns are described in more detail in the sections where they are relevant. For example, information about how the LEDs show the device’s connection status is in section Connecting DynaFlex II Go to a Host.

    Product Catalogs

    Product Catalogs

    Brochures

    Description

    DynaFlex products are ready to launch your payment environment to the next level. DynaFlex products deliver a wide variety of payment acceptance in a small form-factor. All DynaFlex products offer an integrated secure card reader authenticator for magnetic stripe cards, EMV chip cards (contact and contactless), and NFC enabled mobile wallets including Samsung Pay, Google Pay, and Apple Pay. DynaFlex products designated as “Pro” include a responsive touchscreen with support for Manual Entry and Signature Capture.

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email:

    DynaFlex II PED

    DynaFlex II PED adds a color touchscreen for PIN on Glass, signature capture, and manual card entry to the full DynaFlex II payment set — magstripe, EMV contact, EMV contactless, and NFC mobile wallets, with optional barcode. Purpose-built for teller lines, branch automation, and point of sale, it meets PCI PTS 6.x PED/SRED requirements and connects to Android and Windows hosts over USB. Download brochures and spec sheets below.

    Marketing Materials

    Reference Section

    Information Available

    Power Management

    About Power

    With a sufficiently charged battery, the device will power on when the power button is pressed (see Figure 6-1 - Power Button). The device will also power on when connected to USB power. In USB mode the device will remain in full power mode to provide power to device. If a power-off sequence is initiated, the device will reboot and remain in full power mode.

    How to Charge the Battery

    Per UL requirements, the device is designed to not recharge its internal battery when the external temperature is below 0°C or above 40°C.

    DynaFlex II Go products have an optional rechargeable battery to supply their own power when they are not powered through the USB-C port. The battery must be periodically recharged by connecting the device to a USB port or stand-alone USB charger. The device requires a USB power supply that can provide at least 500mA @ 5V.

    To charge the device, connect it to a USB-C charger or a USB host as described in section 4.3.1 How to Connect DynaFlex II Go to a Host Computer via USB-C. For best results, use the cable that is included with the device. When charging, make sure the device is receiving enough power from the USB connection (the battery level should increase even when the device is in use). A full recharge cycle for a completely drained battery depends on the charging method. From a host USB port at 500mA, full charge takes approximately 5 hours. From a dedicated wall charger, a full charge may take approximately 5 hours. After connecting the device to a power source, make sure the LEDs indicate the device is charging (see sec - How to Connect DynaFlex II Go to a Host Computer via USB-C)

    For important information about the device’s power systems, optimal charging methods during regular use, optimal handling and storage, and other information about keeping the device’s power systems in the best possible condition, see section - Handling to Avoid Accidental Tamper and section About Power.

    How to Power On / Wake Up from Standby Mode / Power Off

    To power on the device connect the device to USB power. To power off the device, disconnect the device from USB power. Press and hold the power button (see Figure 6-1 - Power Button) on the device (for two beeps), all LED indicators should power off and remain unlit. If all LEDs are off, the device is in Powered Off mode. It is important to note the device cannot be powered off when connected via USB.

    DynaFlex II Go will automatically reset once every 24 hours if it is continuously powered on.

    Device Manuals (Product-specific)

    The Device Manuals page is where you will find documentation and instructions for product-specific functions including installation and operational manuals.

    Appendices

    The Installation and Operation Manual is the primary reference for deploying and running DynaFlex II Go. It covers planning, physical installation, configuration, day-to-day operation across tap, swipe, dip, and optional barcode, the device's LED and audio indicators, routine maintenance, and guidance for developers building custom software. Use the reference sections below to jump to a topic.

    About Maintenance Reset

    feedback@magtek.com
    feedback@magtek.com
    feedback@magtek.com
    📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)
  • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

  • Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation! feedback@magtek.com

    A sample Android application provided with the MTUSDK that demonstrates communication with MagTek card readers (including the DynaFlex II Go) and simulates a transaction process.

    MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices, (Android)
    MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices - (Java)
    MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices - (Linux)
    MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices - (Windows)
    MagneFlex Sky, Browser App, Android
    MagTek Reader Management System, Windows App
    EMV Updates Utility - (Web)
    MagneFlex Prism – Navy/Blue/Sky – Demo
    MTUSDK Omni, Android
    MagneFlex Navy, Browser, MFX 2.0 for Windows x64
    MagneFlex Navy, Browser, MFX 2.0 for Windows x86
    support@magtek.com
    📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)
  • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

  • Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation! feedback@magtek.com

    Product Catalogs
    Video Page
    support@magtek.com
    📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)
  • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

  • Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation! feedback@magtek.com

    Product Catalogs
    Video Page
    support@magtek.com
    📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)
  • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

  • Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation! feedback@magtek.com

    DynaFlex II SCR Retail Brochure
    support@magtek.com
    📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)
  • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

  • Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation! feedback@magtek.com

    support@magtek.com
    https://www.magtek.com/support
    https://support.magtek.com
    https://forum.magtek.com
    Submit feedback

    Card Read Result

    Active Mode, armed for a tap transaction

    Armed for Tap

    Tap Read Progress

    Tap Read Progress

    Card Read Result

    Device-wide failure

    During major failures (such as tamper), LED1-LED4 report the nature of the failure based on the most likely steps required to resolve it.

    During major failures (such as tamper), LED1-LED4 report the nature of the failure based on the most likely steps required to resolve it.

    During major failures (such as tamper), LED1-LED4 report the nature of the failure based on the most likely steps required to resolve it.

    During major failures (such as tamper), LED1-LED4 report the nature of the failure based on the most likely steps required to resolve it.

    In This Context

    LED1

    LED2

    LED3

    LED4

    Active Mode, not armed for a tap transaction

    Power

    Connection

    Color

    Means

    Solid

    Solid LEDs generally require an operator or cardholder to take action to change the state the LED is reporting.

    Example: Host is connected. Cardholder or host would have to disconnect. Example: Host is disconnected. Host would have to initiate connection.

    Blinking

    Blinking LEDs generally indicate the device is in the process of doing / attempting something. Blink duty cycle and blink period are generally selected to show urgency or ongoing progress through a series of steps. Example: Device is attempting to pair with the host via Bluetooth® Low Energy (LE).

    Short time

    Table - DynaFlex II Go LED Allocation

    Table - DynaFlex II Go LED Patterns

    Reserved

    LEDs sometimes light for a short time to indicate some process has ended (success or failure) and the device is going to transition to another state soon. Example: Successful card read.

    📞 Phone: 1-800-788-6835 (US) | +1-562-546-6616 (International)
  • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 6:00 AM - 5:00 PM PST

  • Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Official Site: https://www.magtek.com

    • 💬 Developer Forum: https://forum.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    PCI PTS POI Security Policy

    Includes the full Installation & Operational ManualT

    Reference Section

    Information Available

    DynaFlex II Go Manuals

    Includes Quick Installation Guide and the full Installation & Operational Manual

    DynaProx Manuals

    In This Section

    Includes the full Installation & Operational Manual

    Need More Help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    Lists all of the supported symbologies and which are enabled by default.

    A variety of accessories designed to meet a wide range of operational needs.

    Legal notifications

    Reference Section

    Information Available

    Appendix A - Technical Specifications

    Reference Standards and certifications

    Reference Sections

    Need More Help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email:

    These catalogs highlights the DynaFlex II PED, a secure card reader authenticator in a small form factor that is ready to accept tap, swipe, and dip payments in a wide variety of retail environments.

    Video Page

    A collection of short videos designed to give you an overview of the DynaFlex II Go product, how to use it, and the features it offerPED

    For more help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    • 📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)

    • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

    Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    Product Catalogs

    Product-specific Compliance

    This product-compliance compliance documentation page provides the essential compliance and security documentation required to ensure the integrity of specifc secure card readers before and after deployment.

    Product-specific Compliance Documents

    Reference Section

    Information Available

    Compliance documentation for the DynaFlex II Go.

    Universal Compliance Documents

    This universal compliance and security documentation page provides the essential security and inspection guides required to maintain and ensure the physical integrity of MagTek products before and after deployment.

    Product-specific Compliance Documents

    Reference Section

    Information Available

    Common technical details for magnetic stripe cards.

    For more help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    Compliance/Security

    This section holds compliance, security, and standards documentation that spans the product line — the cross-product references that apply regardless of which device you're integrating, such as magnetic-stripe (ANSI/ISO) card data standards, EMV specifications, and general PCI and regulatory guidance. For a specific device's security policy and certifications, see that product's Compliance page under Products.

    Compliance Documents

    Reference Section

    Information Available

    This compliance documentation page provides the essential security and inspection guides required to maintain and ensure the physical integrity of MagTek products before and after deployment.

    Operation and Maintenance

    The merchant or acquirer should daily check the appearance of secure card reader:

    • Inspect the appearance of secure card reader to make sure it is the right product.

    • Inspect whether the Swipe Path has an additional card reader or other inserted bugs, See Figure 4‑1, below.

    • Observe the Chip Card Insertion Slot to determine whether there are any wires or obstructions. See Figure 4‑1, below.

    Appendices

    The Installation and Operation Manual is the primary reference for deploying and running DynaProx. It covers planning, physical installation, configuration, day-to-day operation across tap, swipe, dip, and optional barcode, the device's LED and audio indicators, routine maintenance, and guidance for developers building custom software. Use the reference sections below to jump to a topic.

    DynaFlex II PED Manuals

    Find installation, operation, and reference documentation for the DynaFlex II PIN entry device, including setup guidance and technical specifications for developers and integrators.

    feedback@magtek.com
    📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)
  • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

  • Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation! feedback@magtek.com

    Appendix B - Barcode Reader Symbologies
    Appendix C - Optional Accessories
    Appendix D - Warranty, Standards, and Certifications
    support@magtek.com
    📞 Phone: 1-800-788-6835 (US) | +1-562-546-6616 (International)
  • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 6:00 AM - 5:00 PM PST

  • Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Official Site: https://www.magtek.com

    • 💬 Developer Forum: https://forum.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    DynaFlex II PED Manuals
    📞 Phone: 1-800-788-6835 (US) | +1-562-546-6616 (International)
  • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 6:00 AM - 5:00 PM PST

  • Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Official Site: https://www.magtek.com

    • 💬 Developer Forum: https://forum.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    Magnetic Stripe Card Standards

    Inspect whether the product appearance has been changed.

  • Check if the firmware version is correct.

  • Power on the secure card reader and check that the firmware runs well, as the startup will inspect the hardware security, authenticity, and integrity of firmware. Only the leftmost LED should be on and blinking green

  • Figure 4‑1 - Chip Card Insertion Slot and Swipe Path Examples

    MagTek strongly recommends performing security inspections on a regular schedule. Additional information can be found in DynaFlex II Go, Device Inspection Document. If any problems are detected, stop using the device, set it aside in a secure location, and contact the manufacturer or your acquirer for further advice.

    DynaFlex II Go performs self-tests at power-up and after reset. By default, the device automatically resets and performs self-tests every 23 hours if it is configured to automatically reset 23 hours after booting, otherwise the device automatically resets and performs self-tests every 24 hours if it is configured to automatically reset at a specific time of day. No manual intervention by the operator is required. Self-tests include:

    • Checking the integrity and authenticity of the firmware and cryptographic keys.

    • Checking security mechanisms for signs of tampering.

    The secure card reader has no functionality that gives access to security-sensitive services based on roles. Such services are managed through dedicated tools, using cryptographic authentication.

    DynaFlex II Go products ship from the factory fully secure. There are no security default values that require modifications by the user to meet PCI security requirements, except the “Bluetooth LE passkey.” MagTek recommends one of two options:

    • Devices are ordered with the default passkey changed by MagTek during device configuration prior to shipping

    • The customer change the default passkey with a software utility that changes Property 1.2.2.3.1.9 Bluetooth LE Passkey described in DynaFlex II Go Programmer’s Manual (COMMANDS).

    If the device senses a physical or environmental attack, it erases all sensitive keys, and will have limited functionality. While powered on, the SCR indicates it is in a tampered state by flashing green LEDs 1,3, and 4 as depicted in Figure 4‑2 Tamper Response. If this occurs:

    • Remove the device from service immediately.

    • Store it securely for possible forensics investigation.

    • Contact the manufacturer for assistance. The device will likely need to be returned to the manufacturer for diagnosis and servicing.

    Figure 4 2 Tamper Response

    DynaFlex II Go products support file-based updates of the device’s core firmware (main firmware) and authorized commands for updating sensitive configuration. For optimal device security, MagTek recommends the latest versions of firmware should always be installed.

    Firmware updates are provided as files that have been signed by MagTek. The firmware files can be loaded locally through USB or Bluetooth LE connection by using update tools available from the MagTek web site. The device verifies each update is newer than the installed version, and cryptographically authenticates the file. If version checking or authentication fails, the device erases the update file and reports an error to the host.

    For help with updates to EMV configuration, contact Magensa Remote Services.

    Before DynaFlex II Go products are permanently removed from service, all the keys and sensitive data must be erased. One way to accomplish this is by temporarily removing the back cover, which forces a tamper response.

    If removal from service is only temporary, no action is required. All sensitive data will continue to be protected by the device’s physical and logical protection mechanisms.

    Periodic Inspection

    Self-Test

    Roles and Responsibilities

    Passwords and Certificates

    Tamper Response

    Patching and Updating

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email:

    Decommissioning

    Lists all of the supported symbologies and which are enabled by default.

    Legal notifications

    Reference Section

    Information Available

    Appendix A - Technical Specifications

    Reference Standards and certifications

    Reference Sections

    Need More Help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email:

    Compliance documentation for the iDynamo Gen III.

    For more help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    • 📞 Phone: 1-800-788-6835 (US) | +1-562-546-6616 (International)

    • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 6:00 AM - 5:00 PM PST

    Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Official Site:

    • 💬 Developer Forum:

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    DynaFlex II Go
    Dynamo 5 Gen III

    Product-specific Compliance

    Provides the essential compliance documentation required to ensure the integrity of specifc secure card readers before and after deployment.

    Need More Help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    • 📞 Phone: 1-800-788-6835 (US) | +1-562-546-6616 (International)

    • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 6:00 AM - 5:00 PM PST

    Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal:

    • 📚 Knowledge Base:

    • 💬 Developer Forum:

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    Universal Compliance Documents

    Reference Section

    Information Available

    Installation & Operation Manual

    Manuals and technical documentation for the DynaFlex II PED.

    Operation Manuals

    Need More Help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    • 📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)

    • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

    Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    Appendix A - Technical Specifications

    Reference Standards and Certifications

    • ISO 7810, ISO 7811, AAMVA

    • ISO/IEC 7816-1, 2, 3, & 4 Identification Cards Integrated Circuits with Contacts

    • EMV ICC Specifications for Payment Systems Version 4.3d, L1 Contact and Version 4.4a, L2 Contact EMV Contactless Level 1 Version 3.1a

    • MasterCard TQM

    • MCL v3.1.4, payWave v2.2c, Expresspay 4.1, D-PAS Terminal Payment Application v2.0 PCI PTS POI v6.2 SCR

    • DUKPT TDES, AES 128 DUKPT

    • FCC Part 15 Low Power Transceiver, RX verified per FCC Title 47 Part 15 Subclass C UL/CSA/IEC 62368-1, 2nd edition

    • CE Certified

    • CE Safety: IEC 62368-1: 2014

    • Canada ISED Certified

    • AS/NZS CISPR 32 (2013), AS/NZS 4268 Table 1, Row 59 DTS 2400-2483MHz SRD (802.11), and AS/NZS 4268 (2017) Table 1, Row 43 13.553-13.567MHz (contactless reader)

    • RoHS Compliant the Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EEE) Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) European Directive 2002/95/EC

    • California Proposition 65 (California) IPC-A-610 Class II Assembly

    • EU Directive Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) EU Directive Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Universal Serial Bus Specifications 1.1, 2.0

    • AES-128 and AES-256 Encryption Apple VAS

    • iAP2® Protocol Support Bluetooth® Core Specification 5.2

    Appendix A: Technical Specifications

    Reference Standards and Certifications

    • EMV Contactless Level 1 Version 3.0 MasterCard TQM

    • MCL v3.1.3, payWave v2.2, Expresspay 4.0.2, D-PAS Terminal Payment Application v1.0, D-PAS Terminal Application Specification Bulletins CL TAS-002 v1.1, CL TAS-003 v1.0, CL TAS-004 v1.0 PCI PTS POI v6.1 SCR

    • TDEA (3DES)-CBC using DUKPT

    • FCC Part 15 Low Power Transceiver, RX verified per FCC Title 47 Part 15 Subclass C UL/CSA/IEC 62368-1, 2nd edition

    • CE Certified

    • CE Safety: IEC 62368-1: 2014

    • Canada ISED Certified

    • AS/NZS CISPR 32 (2013), AS/NZS 4268 Table 1, Row 59 DTS 2400-2483MHz SRD (802.11), and

    • AS/NZS 4268 (2017) Table 1, Row 43 13.553-13.567MHz (contactless reader)

    • RoHS Compliant the Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EEE) Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) European Directive 2002/95/EC

    • California Proposition 65 (California) IPC-A-610 Class II Assembly

    • EU Directive Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) EU Directive Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Universal Serial Bus Specifications 1.1, 2.0

    • AES, SHA-256

    Marketing Materials

    Find marketing materials — brochures, spec sheets, and sell sheets — for MagTek products, organized by product family. Use the sections below to browse current card readers, check scanners, OEM components, card-issuance solutions, and legacy products.

    ​​DynaFamily (MMS Dyna Devices)

    Current-generation MMS Dyna payment devices (DynaFlex II and DynaProx).

    Current secure card reader authenticators, by family.

    Check scanners and MICR readers, many with an integrated card reader.

    Reader modules, read heads, and ASICs for OEM integration.

    Instant card issuance and PIN solutions for financial institutions.

    Discontinued and superseded MagTek products.

    Product Catalogs

    Product Catalogs

    Brochures

    Description

    DynaFlex products are ready to launch your payment environment to the next level. DynaFlex products deliver a wide variety of payment acceptance in a small form-factor. All DynaFlex products offer an integrated secure card reader authenticator for magnetic stripe cards, EMV chip cards (contact and contactless), and NFC enabled mobile wallets including Samsung Pay, Google Pay, and Apple Pay. DynaFlex products designated as “Pro” include a responsive touchscreen with support for Manual Entry and Signature Capture.

    iDynamo 5 Gen III

    This compliance documentation page provides the essential security and inspection guides required to maintain PCI PTS approval and ensure the physical integrity of iDynamo 5 Gen III secure card readers before and after deployment.

    Applies to: iDynamo 5 Gen III

    Documents

    Reference Section

    Information Available

    A manual that outlines the step-by-step procedures for visually inspecting the iDynamo 5 Gen III's hardware label, physical appearance, and tamper indicators to verify its authenticity and security before use.

    Operation and Maintenance

    Periodic Inspection

    The merchant or acquirer should inspect the appearance of secure card reader on a daily basis:

    • Inspect the appearance of secure card reader to make sure it is the right product.

    • Inspect whether the Swipe Path has an additional card reader or other inserted bugs, See Figure 4-1, below.

    • Inspect whether the product appearance has been changed.

    • Check if the firmware version is correct.

    • After connecting the device to a USB-C power supply, it will power on, the LED indicator should illuminate green and remain powered on to indicate the device is in an idle state, ready for a transaction. Powering on the secure card reader will test hardware security and authenticity, and the integrity of the installed firmware.

    MSR Swipe Path: The swipe path is smooth. The only moving part is the spring-mounted read head that depresses into the device as the card’s magnetic stripe makes contact with the read head.

    Figure 4-1 - Card Swipe Path Example

    MagTek strongly recommends performing security inspections on a regular schedule. Additional information can be found in [2]. If any problems are detected, stop using the device, set it aside in a secure location, and contact the manufacturer or your acquirer for further advice.

    iDynamo 5 Gen III performs self-tests at power-up and after reset. The device automatically resets and performs self-tests every 24 hours at the configured time of day. No manual intervention by the operator is required. Self-tests include:

    • Checking the integrity and authenticity of the firmware and cryptographic keys.

    • Checking security mechanisms for signs of tampering.

    The secure card reader has no functionality that gives access to security-sensitive services based on roles. Such services are managed through dedicated tools, using cryptographic authentication.

    iDynamo 5 Gen III products ship from the factory fully secure. The devices have no security related default values (e.g., passwords/authentication codes/certificates) that require modification by the user to meet PCI security requirements.

    If the device senses a physical or environmental attack, it erases all sensitive keys and will have limited functionality. While powered on, the SCR indicates it is in a tampered state by illuminating its only LED solid red, as seen in Figure 4-2 Tamper Response. If this occurs:

    • Remove the device from service immediately.

    • Store it securely for a possible forensics investigation.

    • Contact the manufacturer for assistance. The device will likely need to be returned to the manufacturer for diagnosis and servicing.

    Figure 4-2 Tamper Response

    iDynamo 5 Gen III products support file-based updates of the device’s core firmware (main firmware) and authorized commands for updating sensitive configuration. For optimal device security, MagTek recommends the latest versions of firmware should always be installed.

    Firmware updates are provided as files that have been signed by MagTek. The firmware files can be loaded locally through the USB-C interface by using update tools available from the MagTek web site. The device verifies each update is newer than the installed version, and cryptographically authenticates the file with RSA-2048 and SHA-256. If version checking or authentication fails, the device erases the update file and reports an error to the host.

    Before iDynamo 5 Gen III products are permanently removed from service, all the keys and sensitive data must be erased. One way to accomplish this is by temporarily removing the back cover, which forces a tamper response.

    If removal from service is only temporary, no action is required. All sensitive data will continue to be protected by the device’s physical and logical protection mechanisms.

    DynaFamily Materials

    The DynaFamily is MagTek's current generation of secure payment devices, built on a shared MMS command architecture so a single integration effort carries across form factors. Use this section to find brochures, spec sheets, and sell sheets for each DynaFamily device.

    Marketing Materials

    Reference Section

    Information Available

    Multi-interface secure card reader for retail and kiosk payments (no PIN pad).

    Appendices

    The Installation and Operation Manual is the primary reference for deploying and running DynaProx. It covers planning, physical installation, configuration, day-to-day operation across tap, swipe, dip, and optional barcode, the device's LED and audio indicators, routine maintenance, and guidance for developers building custom software. Use the reference sections below to jump to a topic.

    Reference Sections

    Reference Section

    Information Available

    Reference Standards and certifications

    Appendix A References

    The following documents may be used to provide additional details about the device and this security policy:

    • MagTek iDynamo 5 Gen III Installation and Operation Manual PN: D998200614

    • MagTek iDynamo 5 Gen III SRED, Device Inspection Manual PN: D998200620

    • MagTek iDynamo 5 Gen III Programmer’s Manual COMMANDS PN: D998200587

    NIST SP 800-57-1 Recommendation for Key Management

  • ANS X9.24 Part 3:2017, Retail Financial Services Symmetric Key Management, Part 3: Derived Unique Key Per Transaction Using Symmetric Techniques

  • X9 TR-31:2010, Interoperable Secure Key Exchange Key Block Specification for Symmetric Algorithms

  • X9.143 (TR-31) Symmetric Key

  • feedback@magtek.com
    📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)
  • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

  • Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation! feedback@magtek.com

    Appendix B - Barcode Reader Symbologies
    Appendix C - Warranty, Standards, and Certifications
    support@magtek.com

    Self-Test

    Roles and Responsibilities

    Passwords and Certificates

    Tamper Response

    Patching and Updating

    Decommissioning

    📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)
  • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

  • Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation! feedback@magtek.com

    support@magtek.com

    EMV Contactless Reader:

    EMVCo L1 and L2 Contactless Reader

    D-PAS, PayPass/MCL, payWave, Expresspay

    Mobile wallets including but not limited to Apple Pay, Google Pay, Samsung Pay

    Barcode Reader:

    Barcode Media: Labels, paper, smartphone / computer displays Barcode Types: QR Codes, Linear Barcodes, UPC-A, UPC-E, Code 128, PDF417 / Data Matrix, Aztec, etc.

    Field Of View 31.5° total vertical sweep, 42° total horizontal sweep, perpendicular to device face

    Depth Of Field 1.2 in. (30mm) to 13.8 in. (350mm) Integrated white indicator LED

    Current Requirements:

    500 mA Maximum

    Data Storage:

    Not Applicable

    Storage Relative Humidity:

    Up to 90% RH non-condensing

    Vibration Resistance:

    None

    Shock Resistance:

    None

    ESD Tolerance (EMVCo):

    ±12.0 kV air discharge / 5 different paddles

    ESD Tolerance (FCC/CE):

    ±8kV air discharge / ±4kV contact discharge

    Vapor Resistance:

    None

    Dimensions (L x W x H):

    2.76 in. x 2.57 in. x .79 in. (70.10mm x 65.3mm x20.1mm)

    Weight

    DynaFlex II Go = 3.17 oz. (90g) DynaFlex II Go BCR = 3.24 oz. (92g)

    Supported Mounting Options:

    Mounting to host via external clip or embedded lanyard

    Magnetic Stripe Reader:

    Three track bidirectional encrypting reader with MagnePrint

    Magnetic Stripe Decoding:

    Financial (ISO Type B), AAMVA, or Other

    Magnetic Swipe Speeds:

    6 inches per second to 60 inches per second

    EMV Contact Reader:

    Status Indicators:

    4 Monochrome Green LEDs

    1 Integrated white indicator LED for BCR

    Display Type:

    Not Applicable

    Keypad:

    Not Applicable

    Certifications:

    PCI PTS POI v6.2 Certified Secure Card Reader (SCR)

    Tamper Protection:

    The enclosure and associated electronics form a Tamper Resistant Security Module (TRSM) where attempts to penetrate or modify the unit cause all cryptographic keys to be cleared or rendered unusable.

    Power Inputs:

    USB powered via USB-C receptacle

    Power Outputs:

    None

    Rechargeable Battery Type:

    Lithium-Ion Polymer (LiPo)

    Voltage Requirements:

    Wired Connection Types:

    USB-C, compatible with USB 1.1, USB 2.0, USB 3.0

    Vendor-defined USB Human Interface Device (HID) data format

    Wireless Connection Types:

    None

    RF Exposure:

    SAR Certified

    Tested Operating System(s):

    USB Hosts: Windows 11

    Ingress Protection:

    IP30

    Operating Temperature:

    DynaFlex II Go/DynaFlex II Go BCR: 32°F to 95°F (0°C to 35°C)

    Operating Relative Humidity:

    Up to 90% RH non-condensing

    Storage Temperature:

    Shelf Life:

    60 Months Minimum

    Magnetic Read Head Life:

    500k Swipes

    Battery Shelf Life:

    5 years or longer (backup battery)

    Battery Cycle Life:

    Physical Characteristics

    Reader Characteristics

    User Interface Characteristics

    Security Characteristics

    Electrical Characteristics

    Communication Characteristics

    Software Characteristics

    Environmental Resistance

    Reliability

    EMVCo L1 and L2 Contact Reader

    5 VDC

    DynaFlex II Go/DynaFlex II Go BCR: -4°F to 113°F (-20°C to 45°C)

    NA

    Not Applicable

    Keypad:

    Not Applicable

    Security Characteristics

    Certifications:

    PCI PTS POI v6.1 Certified Secure Card Reader (SCR)

    Tamper Protection:

    The enclosure and associated electronics form a Tamper Resistant Security Module (TRSM) where attempts to penetrate or modify the unit cause all cryptographic keys to be cleared or rendered unusable.

    Electrical Characteristics

    Power Inputs:

    USB powered via USB-C receptacle

    RS-232 powered via RS-232 custom receptacle

    Power Outputs:

    None

    Rechargeable Battery Type:

    None

    Voltage Requirements:

    5 VDC

    Current Requirements:

    800 mA recommended.

    Note: Avoid poor quality cables, or cables longer than 12ft in length, as they can lead to unexpected reader behavior. Refer to Table 1-2 - DynaProx Accessories for cable options.

    Data Storage:

    Not Applicable

    Communication Characteristics

    Wired Connection Types:

    USB-C, compatible with USB 1.1, USB 2.0, USB 3.0

    Vendor-defined USB Human Interface Device (HID) data format

    RS-232 Interface

    Wireless Connection Types:

    None

    RF Exposure:

    Exempt from SAR requirements due to radiated power substantially below regulatory thresholds.

    IP66

    Operating Temperature:

    DynaProx: -22°F to 185°F (-30°C to 85°C) – DynaProx BCR: -4F to 131°F (-20°C to 55°C)

    Operating Relative Humidity:

    Up to 90% non-condensing

    Storage Temperature:

    DynaProx: -30°C to 85°C (-22°F to 185°F) – DynaProx BCR: -30°C to 70°C (-22°F to 158°F)

    Storage Relative Humidity:

    Up to 90% non-condensing

    Vibration Resistance:

    5Hz to 50Hz sinusoidal vibrations for 10 minutes at 1g acceleration on each of XYZ axes

    Shock Resistance:

    IK08

    ESD Tolerance (EMVCo):

    Not Applicable

    ESD Tolerance (FCC/CE):

    ±8kV contact discharge / ±16kV air discharge when properly grounded

    Vapor Resistance:

    Test Gasoline-96 RON (Reference Gasoline); Reference Fuel C; Diesel 2007 Emission Certification Fuel (Reference Diesel); E10; E25; E85; M15; Road-Use Diesel; Road Use Unleaded

    Reliability

    Shelf Life:

    60 months at 25°C nominal

    Magnetic Read Head Life:

    Not Applicable

    ICC Read Head Life:

    Not Applicable

    Battery Shelf Life:

    5 years or longer (backup battery)

    Battery Cycle Life:

    NA

    Dimensions (L x W x H):

    2.09 in. x 2.52 in. x .72 in. (53mm x 64mm x18.5mm)

    Weight

    DynaProx = 2.0 oz. (56g) DynaProx BCR = 2.0 oz. (58g)

    Supported Mounting Options:

    Mounting Screw Holes Optional Stand

    Magnetic Stripe Reader:

    Not Applicable

    EMV Contact Reader:

    Not Applicable

    EMV Contactless Reader:

    EMVCo L1 and L2 Contactless Reader

    D-PAS, PayPass/MCL, payWave, Expresspay

    Mobile wallets including but not limited to Apple Pay, Google Pay, Samsung Pay

    Barcode Reader:

    Barcode Media: Labels, paper, smartphone / computer displays Barcode Types: QR Codes, Linear Barcodes, UPC-A, UPC-E, Code 128, PDF417 / Data Matrix, Aztec, etc.

    Field Of View 31.5° total vertical sweep, 42° total horizontal sweep, perpendicular to device face

    Depth Of Field 1.2 in. (30mm) to 13.8 in. (350mm) Integrated white indicator LED

    User Interface Characteristics

    Status Indicators:

    4 Monochrome Green LEDs

    Software Characteristics

    Tested Operating System(s):

    USB Hosts: Windows 10, Android 4.4.2 and above

    Environmental Resistance

    Physical Characteristics

    Card Read Characteristics

    DynaProx Products Technical Specifications

    Display Type:

    Ingress Protection:

    https://www.magtek.com/support
    https://support.magtek.com
    https://forum.magtek.com
    Submit feedback

    DynaProx

    MagneSafe V5 SCRAs

    iDynamo 6

    tDynamo (Gen I, II)

    eDynamo

    DynaWave

    Excella

    Excella STX

    ImageSafe

    MICRSafe

    OEM Readers

    oDynamo

    OEM Components

    MagneSafe IntelliHead

    MagneSafe ASIC

    ASICs

    QwickCards

    QwickPIN

    Card Readers

    BulleT

    kDynamo

    Card Readers

    MICR and Check Scanners

    OEM Readers and Components

    Card Issuance & Personalization

    Legacy Products

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    • 📞 Phone: 1-800-788-6835 (US) | +1-562-546-6616 (International)

    • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 6:00 AM - 5:00 PM PST

    Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal:

    • 📚 Knowledge Base:

    • 💬 Developer Forum:

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    DynaFlex II SCR​​
    ​​DynaFlex II PED
    DynaFlex II Go

    Magnetic Stripe Readers

    This comprehensive catalog introduces MagTek as a leading manufacturer of secure electronic systems, including card readers, encrypting check scanners, PIN pads, and credential personalization systems. It also details the capabilities of Magensa, MagTek's cloud service subsidiary, which provides secure gateway, remote management, and decryption services for processing transactions using authentication, encryption, and tokenization.

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    • 📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)

    • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

    Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    DynaFlex I Family, Retail Brochure
    Gateway Solutions Overview

    Package Inspection Document, Without Stand

    A guide that details how to examine the device's secure packaging for signs of tampering during storage or transit, helping to ensure the reader has not been compromised before deployment.

    PCI PTS POI Security Policy

    This document addresses the proper use of theiDynamo 5 Gen III secure card readers (SCR) in a secure manner.

    For more help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    • 📞 Phone: 1-800-788-6835 (US) | +1-562-546-6616 (International)

    • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 6:00 AM - 5:00 PM PST

    Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Official Site:

    • 💬 Developer Forum:

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    Device Inspection Document

    DynaFlex II PED

    PIN-on-Glass reader with touchscreen for banking and point of sale.

    DynaProx

    EMV contactless and optional-barcode reader for kiosks and unattended terminals.

    DynaFlex II Go

    Handheld Bluetooth / USB-C reader for mobile payments.

    For more help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    • 📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)

    • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

    Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    DynaFlex II SCR

    Appendix B - Warranty, Standards, and Certification

    Legal notifications

    Need More Help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    • 📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)

    • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

    Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    Appendix A - Technical Specifications
    https://www.magtek.com
    https://forum.magtek.com

    DynaProx

    Download the software for developing with and managing the DynaProx contactless reader. This page brings together the MagTek Universal SDK (MTUSDK) for MMS devices on Android, iOS, Linux, and Windows, along with demo and sample apps, EMV and barcode configuration utilities, EMV tag packages, the MagneFlex Browser and middleware, and the Reader Management System clients for enterprise firmware and configuration updates.

    DynaProx Downloads

    API/SDK

    Description

    Summary

    A web console that accepts an OID and command data and returns the data to use for MTUSDK configuration commands on DynaFlex and DynaProx devices.

    The MagneFlex Browser is a full function browser this free development tool can be white-labelled and provides a turnkey integration solution for web applications, working with MagTek hardware and services. Sites developed in HTML 5 with device responsive views will work seamlessly in this browser allowing an app to respond to devices whether they are tablets or phones.

    Appendix B: Warranty, Standards, and Certifications

    LIMITED WARRANTY

    MagTek warrants that the products sold pursuant to this Agreement will perform in accordance with MagTek’s published specifications. This warranty shall be provided only for a period of one year from the date of the shipment of the product from MagTek (the “Warranty Period”). This warranty shall apply only to the “Buyer” (the original purchaser, unless that entity resells the product as authorized by MagTek, in which event this warranty shall apply only to the first repurchaser).

    During the Warranty Period, should this product fail to conform to MagTek’s specifications, MagTek will, at its option, repair or replace this product at no additional charge except as set forth below. Repair parts and replacement products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new. All replaced parts and products become the property of MagTek. This limited warranty does not include service to repair damage to the product resulting from accident, disaster, unreasonable use, misuse, abuse, negligence, or modification of the product not authorized by MagTek. MagTek reserves the right to examine the alleged defective goods to determine whether the warranty is applicable.

    Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, MagTek specifically disclaims any liability or warranty for goods resold in other than MagTek’s original packages, and for goods modified, altered, or treated without authorization by MagTek.

    Service may be obtained by delivering the product during the warranty period to MagTek (1710 Apollo Court, Seal Beach, CA 90740). If this product is delivered by mail or by an equivalent shipping carrier, the customer agrees to insure the product or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit, to prepay shipping charges to the warranty service location, and to use the original shipping container or equivalent. MagTek will return the product, prepaid, via a three (3) day shipping service. A Return Material Authorization (“RMA”) number must accompany all returns. Buyers may obtain an RMA number by contacting MagTek Support Services at (888) 624-8350.

    EACH BUYER UNDERSTANDS THAT THIS MAGTEK PRODUCT IS OFFERED AS-IS. MAGTEK MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND MAGTEK DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OF ANY OTHER KIND, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

    IF THIS PRODUCT DOES NOT CONFORM TO MAGTEK’S SPECIFICATIONS, THE SOLE REMEDY SHALL BE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED ABOVE. MAGTEK’S LIABILITY, IF ANY, SHALL IN NO EVENT EXCEED THE TOTAL AMOUNT PAID TO MAGTEK UNDER THIS AGREEMENT. IN NO EVENT WILL MAGTEK BE LIABLE TO THE BUYER FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE, SUCH PRODUCT, EVEN IF MAGTEK HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY.

    LIMITATION ON LIABILITY

    EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THE SECTIONS RELATING TO MAGTEK’S LIMITED WARRANTY, MAGTEK’S LIABILITY UNDER THIS AGREEMENT IS LIMITED TO THE CONTRACT PRICE OF THIS PRODUCT.

    MAGTEK MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS MAY BE STATED IN THIS AGREEMENT, AND MAGTEK DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

    MAGTEK SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR CONTINGENT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY. MAGTEK FURTHER LIMITS ITS LIABILITY OF ANY KIND WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE ON ITS PART, TO THE CONTRACT PRICE FOR THE GOODS.

    MAGTEK’S SOLE LIABILITY AND BUYER’S EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES ARE STATED IN THIS SECTION AND IN THE SECTION RELATING TO MAGTEK’S LIMITED WARRANTY

    This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

    (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

    Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

    · Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

    · Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

    · Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

    · Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

    Caution: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by MagTek could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.

    This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.

    Le présent appareil numérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la classe B prescrites dans le Réglement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le ministère des Communications du Canada.

    This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

    Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conformé à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

    This device complies with ISED Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

    Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.

    Testing for compliance with CE requirements was performed by an independent laboratory. The unit under test was found compliant with standards established for Class B devices.

    Hereby, MagTek Inc. declares that the radio equipment types Wideband Transmission System (Wireless LAN and Bluetooth® Low Energy), and Non-Specific Short Range Device (contactless) are in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declarations of conformity is available at the following internet addresses:

    · for DynaFlex with no display, USB connection

    · for DynaFlex with no display, Bluetooth® LE connection

    · for DynaFlex Pro with USB connection

    · for DynaFlex Pro with Bluetooth® LE connection

    · for DynaFlex Pro with WLAN connection

    Hereby, MagTek Inc. declares that the radio equipment types Wideband Transmission System (Wireless LAN and Bluetooth Low Energy), and Non-Specific Short Range Device (contactless) are in compliance with Radio Equipment Regulations 2017 Directive S.I.2017:1206. The full text of the UKCA declarations of conformity is available at the following internet addresses:

    · for DynaFlex with no display, USB connection

    · for DynaFlex with no display, Bluetooth® LE connection

    · for DynaFlex Pro with USB connection

    · for DynaFlex Pro with Bluetooth® LE connection

    · for DynaFlex Pro with WLAN connection

    Testing for compliance with AS/NZS standards was performed by a registered and accredited laboratory. The unit under test was found compliant with standards established under AS/NZS CISPR 32 (2013), AS/NZS 4268 Table 1, Row 59 DTS 2400-2483MHz SRD (802.11), and AS/NZS 4268 (2017) Table 1,

    Row 43 13.553-13.567MHz (contactless reader).

    This product is recognized per UL 60950-1, 2nd Edition, 2011-12-19 (Information Technology Equipment - Safety - Part 1: General Requirements), CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-07, 2nd Edition, 2011-12 (Information Technology Equipment - Safety - Part 1: General Requirements).

    When ordered as RoHS compliant, this product meets the Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EEE) Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive (EU) 2015/863 amending Annex II to Directive 2011/65/EU. The marking is clearly recognizable, either as written words like “Pb-free,” “lead-free,” or as another clear symbol ( ).

    PCI Security Standards Council, LLC (“PCI SSC”) has approved this PTS POI device (SCR class) to be compliant with the PCI PTS POI Security Requirements v5.1.

    When granted, PCI SSC approval is provided by PCI SSC to ensure certain security and operational characteristics important to the achievement of PCI SSC’s goals, but PCI SSC approval does not under any circumstances include any endorsement or warranty regarding the functionality, quality or performance of any particular product or service. PCI SSC does not warrant any products or services provided by third parties. PCI SSC approval does not under any circumstances include or imply any product warranties from PCI SSC, including, without limitation, any implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for purpose, or non-infringement, all of which are expressly disclaimed by PCI SSC. All rights and remedies regarding products and services which have received PCI SSC approval shall be provided by the party providing such products or services, and not by PCI SSC.

    IMPORTANT: YOU SHOULD CAREFULLY READ ALL THE TERMS, CONDITIONS AND RESTRICTIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT BEFORE INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE. YOUR INSTALLATION OF THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE PRESUMES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS, CONDITIONS, AND RESTRICTIONS CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THESE TERMS, CONDITIONS, AND RESTRICTIONS, PROMPTLY RETURN THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE AND ASSOCIATED DOCUMENTATION TO THE ADDRESS IN THIS DOCUMENT, ATTENTION: CUSTOMER SUPPORT.

    TERMS, CONDITIONS, AND RESTRICTIONS

    MagTek, Incorporated (the "Licensor") owns and has the right to distribute the described software and documentation, collectively referred to as the "Software."

    LICENSE: Licensor grants you (the "Licensee") the right to use the Software in conjunction with MagTek products. LICENSEE MAY NOT COPY, MODIFY, OR TRANSFER THE SOFTWARE IN WHOLE OR IN PART EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS AGREEMENT. Licensee may

    not decompile, disassemble, or in any other manner attempt to reverse engineer the Software. Licensee shall not tamper with, bypass, or alter any security features of the software or attempt to do so.

    TRANSFER: Licensee may not transfer the Software or license to the Software to another party without the prior written authorization of the Licensor. If Licensee transfers the Software without authorization, all rights granted under this Agreement are automatically terminated.

    COPYRIGHT: The Software is copyrighted. Licensee may not copy the Software except for archival purposes or to load for execution purposes. All other copies of the Software are in violation of this Agreement.

    TERM: This Agreement is in effect as long as Licensee continues the use of the Software. The Licensor also reserves the right to terminate this Agreement if Licensee fails to comply with any of the terms, conditions, or restrictions contained herein. Should Licensor terminate this Agreement due to Licensee's failure to comply, Licensee agrees to return the Software to Licensor. Receipt of returned Software by the Licensor shall mark the termination.

    LIMITED WARRANTY: Licensor warrants to the Licensee that the disk(s) or other media on which the Software is recorded are free from defects in material or workmanship under normal use.

    THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS. LICENSOR MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

    Because of the diversity of conditions and hardware under which the Software may be used, Licensor does not warrant that the Software will meet Licensee specifications or that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or free of errors.

    IN NO EVENT WILL THE LICENSOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE, OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE. Licensee's sole remedy in

    the event of a defect in material or workmanship is expressly limited to replacement of the Software disk(s) if applicable.

    GOVERNING LAW: If any provision of this Agreement is found to be unlawful, void, or unenforceable, that provision shall be removed from consideration under this Agreement and will not affect the enforceability of any of the remaining provisions. This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of California and shall inure to the benefit of MagTek, Incorporated, its successors or assigns.

    ACKNOWLEDGMENT: LICENSEE ACKNOWLEDGES THAT LICENSEE HAS READ THIS AGREEMENT, UNDERSTANDS ALL OF ITS TERMS, CONDITIONS, AND RESTRICTIONS, AND AGREES TO BE BOUND BY THEM. LICENSEE ALSO AGREES THAT THIS AGREEMENT SUPERSEDES ANY AND ALL VERBAL AND WRITTEN COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN LICENSOR AND LICENSEE OR THEIR ASSIGNS RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS AGREEMENT.

    QUESTIONS REGARDING THIS AGREEMENT SHOULD BE ADDRESSED IN WRITING TO MAGTEK, INCORPORATED, ATTENTION: CUSTOMER SUPPORT, AT THE ADDRESS LISTED IN THIS DOCUMENT, OR E-MAILED TO .

    DEMO SOFTWARE / SAMPLE CODE: Unless otherwise stated, all demo software and sample code are to be used by Licensee for demonstration purposes only and MAY NOT BE incorporated into any production or live environment. The PIN Pad sample implementation is for software PIN Pad test purposes only and is not PCI compliant. To meet PCI compliance in production or live environments, a third-party PCI compliant component (hardware or software-based) must be used.

    Installation and Operation Manual

    The Installation and Operation Manual is the primary reference for deploying and running DynaProx. It covers planning, mounting and cabling, configuration, day-to-day contactless (and optional barcode) operation, routine maintenance, and guidance for developers integrating the device. Use the reference sections below to jump to a topic.

    Reference Sections

    Reference Section

    Information Available

    Overview of DynaProx, its contactless transaction methods (EMV Contactless, NFC Contactless, MIFARE®, and optional barcode on BCR models), intended audience, and how to use this manual.

    Installation and Operation Manual

    The Installation and Operation Manual is the primary reference for deploying and running DynaFlex II Go. It covers planning, physical installation, configuration, day-to-day operation across tap, swipe, dip, and optional barcode, the device's LED and audio indicators, routine maintenance, and guidance for developers building custom software. Use the reference sections below to jump to a topic.

    Reference Sections

    Reference Section

    Information Available

    Overview of DynaFlex II Go, its supported transaction methods (tap, swipe, dip, and optional barcode), model variants, intended audience, and how to use this manual.

    Appendix C: Warranty, Standards, and Certifications

    MagTek warrants that the products sold pursuant to this Agreement will perform in accordance with MagTek’s published specifications. This warranty shall be provided only for a period of one year from the date of the shipment of the product from MagTek (the “Warranty Period”). This warranty shall apply only to the “Buyer” (the original purchaser, unless that entity resells the product as authorized by MagTek, in which event this warranty shall apply only to the first repurchaser).

    During the Warranty Period, should this product fail to conform to MagTek’s specifications, MagTek will, at its option, repair or replace this product at no additional charge except as set forth below. Repair parts and replacement products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new. All replaced parts and products become the property of MagTek. This limited warranty does not include service to repair damage to the product resulting from accident, disaster, unreasonable use, misuse, abuse, negligence, or modification of the product not authorized by MagTek. MagTek reserves the right to examine the alleged defective goods to determine whether the warranty is applicable.

    Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, MagTek specifically disclaims any liability or warranty for goods resold in other than MagTek’s original packages, and for goods modified, altered, or treated without authorization by MagTek.

    Service may be obtained by delivering the product during the warranty period to MagTek (1710 Apollo Court, Seal Beach, CA 90740). If this product is delivered by mail or by an equivalent shipping carrier, the customer agrees to insure the product or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit, to prepay shipping charges to the warranty service location, and to use the original shipping container or equivalent. MagTek will return the product, prepaid, via a three (3) day shipping service. A Return Material Authorization (“RMA”) number must accompany all returns. Buyers may obtain an RMA number by contacting MagTek Support Services at (562) 546-6800.

    Magnetic Stripe Card Standards

    Planning and Preparation

    The guidelines in the following sections are intended to help project planners and system administrators plan for the physical and logical requirements of deploying and using DynaProx products. The most effective way to ensure smooth deployment of a solution is to consider these factors before receiving the device.

    • Determine what type of host DynaProx will connect to. For a list of supported device types and operating systems, see . When planning, be sure to include any additional support or devices required by the host and DynaProx, such as physical locations, mounting, power connections, and charging cradles.

    • Determine what connection the host will use to communicate with the device. Depending on the device model (see), the connection can be USB or RS-232.

    feedback@magtek.com
    feedback@magtek.com
    feedback@magtek.com
    https://www.magtek.com/support
    https://support.magtek.com
    https://forum.magtek.com
    iDynamo 5 (Gen I,II)
    iDynamo 5 Gen III
    DynaMag
    DynaPAD
    Submit feedback

    A sample iOS application that works with the MTUSDK to demonstrate communication with MagTek card readers and provide a user experience that simulates a transaction.

    BCR Utility for BCR Devices

    A utility for demonstrating and testing barcode-reading operations on DynaFlex BCR and DynaProx BCR devices (models equipped with a barcode reader).

    MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices, (Android)

    An Android Software Development Kit that provides tools, a sample application, sample code, and documentation for developers creating solutions for MagTek MMS devices on Android hosts.

    MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices (iOS)

    An iOS SDK that provides the necessary tools, sample application, sample code, and documentation for developers building iOS solutions for MagTek MMS devices.

    MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices - (Linux)

    A Linux-based SDK that includes sample applications, code, and documentation for building software solutions for MagTek MMS devices on Linux hosts.

    MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices - (Windows)

    A Windows SDK that provides sample code, documentation, and a demo application to help developers integrate MagTek MMS devices into Windows-based host applications.

    Description

    Summary

    MagTek Reader Management System, iOS

    An iOS app that is part of a suite of tools for remotely configuring and updating a large number of geographically dispersed MagTek readers across an enterprise, including the DynaFlex II Go and other Dyna devices.

    MagTek Reader Management System, Windows App

    A Windows application that automates the configuration and firmware updates for a wide range of MagTek readers, including all DynaFlex II models, across an enterprise deployment.

    Description

    Summary

    EMV Updates Utility - (Web)

    A configuration utility for a variety of DynaFlex and DynaProx devices used to change or update EMV configurations, run demo EMV transactions, upload bitmap images, and parse TLV data.

    MagneFlex Prism – Navy/Blue/Sky – Demo

    A demo web page designed to illustrate the functionality of the MagneFlex Browser, which can be launched on Android, iOS, and Windows versions of the browser.

    MTUSDK Omni, Android

    Description

    Summary

    DynaProx Magensa Universal TAGs

    A downloadable package of Magensa Universal EMV configuration tags (TLV terminal settings) for provisioning DynaProx devices.

    Description

    Summary

    MagneFlex Navy, Browser, MFX 2.0 for Windows x64

    A full-function HTML browser application for Windows x64, featuring a developer mode for debugging JavaScript, improved HTML/framework rendering, and tabbed browsing.

    MagneFlex Navy, Browser, MFX 2.0 for Windows x86

    A full-function HTML browser application for Windows x86, featuring the same developer tools and modern rendering capabilities as the x64 version.

    Description

    Summary

    MagneFlex Powder Middleware

    A lightweight middleware application that manages communications between a POS application and the hardware for DynaFlex and DynaProx products, streamlining data processing.

    Apps

    Demo Programs

    EMV Tags & CAPK

    Magneflex Browser

    MagneFlex Middleware

    Need More Help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    • 📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)

    • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

    Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    OID Converter Console (Web)

    A sample Android application provided with the MTUSDK that demonstrates communication with MagTek card readers (including the DynaFlex II Go) and simulates a transaction process.

    EACH BUYER UNDERSTANDS THAT THIS MAGTEK PRODUCT IS OFFERED AS-IS. MAGTEK MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND MAGTEK DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OF ANY OTHER KIND, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

    IF THIS PRODUCT DOES NOT CONFORM TO MAGTEK’S SPECIFICATIONS, THE SOLE REMEDY SHALL BE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED ABOVE. MAGTEK’S LIABILITY, IF ANY, SHALL IN NO EVENT EXCEED THE TOTAL AMOUNT PAID TO MAGTEK UNDER THIS AGREEMENT. IN NO EVENT WILL MAGTEK BE LIABLE TO THE BUYER FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE, SUCH PRODUCT, EVEN IF MAGTEK HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY.

    EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THE SECTIONS RELATING TO MAGTEK’S LIMITED WARRANTY, MAGTEK’S LIABILITY UNDER THIS AGREEMENT IS LIMITED TO THE CONTRACT PRICE OF THIS PRODUCT.

    MAGTEK MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS MAY BE STATED IN THIS AGREEMENT, AND MAGTEK DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

    MAGTEK SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR CONTINGENT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY. MAGTEK FURTHER LIMITS ITS LIABILITY OF ANY KIND WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE ON ITS PART, TO THE CONTRACT PRICE FOR THE GOODS.

    MAGTEK’S SOLE LIABILITY AND BUYER’S EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES ARE STATED IN THIS SECTION AND IN THE SECTION RELATING TO MAGTEK’S LIMITED WARRANTY.

    This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

    This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.

    Le présent appareil numérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la classe B prescrites dans le Réglement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le ministère des Communications du Canada.

    This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

    Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conformé à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

    This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

    Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.

    This product is recognized per Underwriter Laboratories and Canadian Underwriter Laboratories 1950.

    Testing for compliance with CE requirements was performed by an independent laboratory. The unit under test was found compliant with standards established for Class B devices.

    Hereby, MagTek Inc. declares that the radio equipment types Wideband Transmission System (802.11 wireless and Bluetooth Low Energy), and Non-Specific Short Range Device (contactless) are in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declarations of conformity is available at the following internet addresses:

    • https://www.magtek.com/Content/DocumentationFiles/D998200238.pdf.

    • https://www.magtek.com/Content/DocumentationFiles/D998200296.pdf

    Testing for compliance with AS/NZS standards was performed by a registered and accredited laboratory. The unit under test was found compliant with standards established under AS/NZS CISPR 32 (2013), AS/NZS 4268 Table 1, Row 59 DTS 2400-2483MHz SRD (802.11), and AS/NZS 4268 (2017) Table 1,

    Row 43 13.553-13.567MHz (contactless reader).

    This product is recognized per UL 60950-1, 2nd Edition, 2011-12-19 (Information Technology Equipment - Safety - Part 1: General Requirements), CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-07, 2nd Edition, 2011-12 (Information Technology Equipment - Safety - Part 1: General Requirements).

    When ordered as RoHS compliant, this product meets the Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EEE) Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive (EU) 2015/863 amending Annex II to Directive 2011/65/EU. The marking is clearly recognizable, either as written words like “Pb-free,” “lead-free,” or as another clear symbol ( ).

    PCI Security Standards Council, LLC (“PCI SSC”) has approved this PIN Transaction Security Device to be in compliance with PCI SSC’s PIN Security Requirements.

    When granted, PCI SSC approval is provided by PCI SSC to ensure certain security and operational characteristics important to the achievement of PCI SSC’s goals, but PCI SSC approval does not under any circumstances include any endorsement or warranty regarding the functionality, quality or performance of any particular product or service. PCI SSC does not warrant any products or services provided by third parties. PCI SSC approval does not under any circumstances include or imply any product warranties from PCI SSC, including, without limitation, any implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for purpose, or non-infringement, all of which are expressly disclaimed by PCI SSC. All rights and remedies regarding products and services which have received PCI SSC approval shall be provided by the party providing such products or services, and not by PCI SSC.

    This product has been evaluated by multiple safety certification agencies, including Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC Class A and Class B), and is designed to protect both the user and the device. This document is written specifically to work in conjunction with these safety and integrity features to protect the user and the device. It is very important to follow all steps in the product documentation carefully, in the order in which they are described, and at the recommended times. Failure to do so could result in personal injury, and / or cause damage to the device, and / or void the product warranty.

    IMPORTANT: YOU SHOULD CAREFULLY READ ALL THE TERMS, CONDITIONS AND RESTRICTIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT BEFORE INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE. YOUR INSTALLATION OF THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE PRESUMES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS, CONDITIONS, AND RESTRICTIONS CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THESE TERMS, CONDITIONS, AND RESTRICTIONS, PROMPTLY RETURN THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE AND ASSOCIATED DOCUMENTATION TO THE ADDRESS IN THIS DOCUMENT, ATTENTION: CUSTOMER SUPPORT.

    TERMS, CONDITIONS, AND RESTRICTIONS

    MagTek, Incorporated (the "Licensor") owns and has the right to distribute the described software and documentation, collectively referred to as the "Software."

    LICENSE: Licensor grants you (the "Licensee") the right to use the Software in conjunction with MagTek products. LICENSEE MAY NOT COPY, MODIFY, OR TRANSFER THE SOFTWARE IN WHOLE OR IN PART EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS AGREEMENT. Licensee may not decompile, disassemble, or in any other manner attempt to reverse engineer the Software. Licensee shall not tamper with, bypass, or alter any security features of the software or attempt to do so.

    TRANSFER: Licensee may not transfer the Software or license to the Software to another party without the prior written authorization of the Licensor. If Licensee transfers the Software without authorization, all rights granted under this Agreement are automatically terminated.

    COPYRIGHT: The Software is copyrighted. Licensee may not copy the Software except for archival purposes or to load for execution purposes. All other copies of the Software are in violation of this Agreement.

    TERM: This Agreement is in effect as long as Licensee continues the use of the Software. The Licensor also reserves the right to terminate this Agreement if Licensee fails to comply with any of the terms, conditions, or restrictions contained herein. Should Licensor terminate this Agreement due to Licensee's failure to comply, Licensee agrees to return the Software to Licensor. Receipt of returned Software by the Licensor shall mark the termination.

    LIMITED WARRANTY: Licensor warrants to the Licensee that the disk(s) or other media on which the Software is recorded are free from defects in material or workmanship under normal use.

    THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS. LICENSOR MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

    Because of the diversity of conditions and hardware under which the Software may be used, Licensor does not warrant that the Software will meet Licensee specifications or that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or free of errors.

    IN NO EVENT WILL LICENSOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE, OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE. Licensee's sole remedy in

    the event of a defect in material or workmanship is expressly limited to replacement of the Software disk(s) if applicable.

    GOVERNING LAW: If any provision of this Agreement is found to be unlawful, void, or unenforceable, that provision shall be removed from consideration under this Agreement and will not affect the enforceability of any of the remaining provisions. This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of California and shall inure to the benefit of MagTek, Incorporated, its successors or assigns.

    ACKNOWLEDGMENT: LICENSEE ACKNOWLEDGES THAT LICENSEE HAS READ THIS AGREEMENT, UNDERSTANDS ALL OF ITS TERMS, CONDITIONS, AND RESTRICTIONS, AND AGREES TO BE BOUND BY THEM. LICENSEE ALSO AGREES THAT THIS AGREEMENT SUPERSEDES ANY AND ALL VERBAL AND WRITTEN COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN LICENSOR AND LICENSEE OR THEIR ASSIGNS RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS AGREEMENT.

    QUESTIONS REGARDING THIS AGREEMENT SHOULD BE ADDRESSED IN WRITING TO MAGTEK, INCORPORATED, ATTENTION: CUSTOMER SUPPORT, AT THE ADDRESS LISTED IN THIS DOCUMENT, OR E-MAILED TO feedback@magtek.com.

    DEMO SOFTWARE / SAMPLE CODE: Unless otherwise stated, all demo software and sample code are to be used by Licensee for demonstration purposes only and MAY NOT BE incorporated into any production or live environment. The PIN Pad sample implementation is for software PIN Pad test purposes only and is not PCI compliant. To meet PCI compliance in production or live environments, a third-party PCI compliant component (hardware or software-based) must be used.

    LIMITED WARRANTY

    LIMITATION ON LIABILITY

    FCC INFORMATION

    Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

    • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

    Caution: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by MagTek could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.

    CANADIAN DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

    INDUSTRY CANADA (IC) RSS

    CUR/UR

    CE STANDARDS

    EU STATEMENT

    AUSTRALIA / NEW ZEALAND STATEMENT

    UL/CSA

    ROHS STATEMENT

    PCI STATEMENT

    SAFETY

    Caution: Never do any of the following:

    • DO NOT use a ground adapter plug to connect equipment to a power socket-outlet that lacks a ground connection terminal.

    • DO NOT attempt any maintenance function that is not specifically described in this manual or in other ExpressCard 3000 instructional documents published by MagTek.

    SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

    Need More Help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email:

    7811-3

    Location of embossed characters

    7811-4

    Location of tracks 1 & 2

    7811-5

    Location of track 3

    7811-6

    Magnetic stripe - high coercivity

    7813

    Financial transaction cards

    Measurement - 0.223"

    Track

    Recording Density (bits per inch)

    Character Configuration (including parity bit)

    Information Content (including control characters)

    0.110"

    1 IATA

    210

    76 alphanumeric data characters between Format Code and Discretionary Data.

    SS

    FC

    PAN

    FS

    Name

    FS

    Additional data

    Discretionary Data

    ES

    • SS: Start Sentinel - %

    • FC: Format Code - ^

    • PAN: Primary Account Number (19 digits max.)

    • FS: Field Separator

    • NAME: Name (26 alphanumeric characters max.)

    • ADDITIONAL DATA: Number of characters:

      • Expiration Date (YYMM) - 4

      • Service Code - 3

    • DISCRETIONARY DATA: Number of characters:

      • PVKI - PIN Verification Key Number

      • PVV or Offset - PIN Verification Value

      • CVV or CVC - Card Verification Value, Card Vakudation Code

    • ES: End Sentinel - ?

    • LRC: Logitudinal Redundancy Check character

    37 data characters between PAN and Discretionary Data.

    SS

    PAN

    FS

    Additional data

    Discretionary Data

    ES

    LRC

    • SS: Start Sentinel - Hex B - ;

    • PAN: Primary Account Number (19 digits max.)

    • FS: Field Separator - Hex D - =

    • ADDITIONAL DATA: Number of characters:

      • Expiration Date (YYMM) - 4

      • Service Code - 3

    • DISCRETIONARY DATA: Number of characters:

      • PVKI - PIN Verification Key Number

      • PVV or Offset - PIN Verification Value

      • CVV or CVC - Card Verification Value, Card Vakudation Code

    • ES: End Sentinel - Hex F - ?

    • LRC: Logitudinal Redundancy Check character

    104 numeric data characters between Format Code and Additional Data.

    SS

    FC

    PAN

    FS

    USE AND SECURITY DATA

    Additional data

    ES

    LRC

    • SS: Start Sentinel - Hex B - ;

    • PAN: Primary Account Number (19 digits max.)

    • FS: Field Separator - Hex D - =

    • USE AND SECURITY DATA - Number of characters

      • Country Code (optional) - 3

      • Currency Code - 3

      • Currency Exponent - 1

      • Amount Authorized per Cycle - 4

      • Amount Remaining this Cycle - 4

      • Cycle Begin (Validity Date) - 4

      • Cycle Length - 2

      • Retry Count - 1

      • PIN Control Parameters (optional) - 6

      • Interchange Controls - 1

      • PAN Service Restriction - 2

      • SAN-1 Service Restriction - 2

      • SAN-2 Service Restriction - 2

      • Expiration Date (optional) - 4

      • Card Sequence Number - 1

      • Card Security Number (optional) - 9

    • ADDITIONAL DATA: Number of characters:

      • First subsidiary account number (optional)

      • Second subsidiary account number (optional)

      • Relay marker - 1

    • ES: End Sentinel - Hex F - ?

    • LRC: Logitudinal Redundancy Check character

    • FC: Format Code - (2 digits) (in place of optional field)

    7810

    Physical characteristics of credit card size document

    7811-1

    Embossing

    7811-2

    Dimensions - Financial Transaction Cards

    ISO

    Magnetic stripe - low coercivity

    For copies of specifications contact: American National Standards Institute 11 W. 42nd Street, New York, NY 10036 212-642-4900

    Magnetic Stripe Encoding

    Magnetic Stripe Encoding

    Track 1

    Encoding Key

    Track 2

    Encoding Key

    Some or all of the above Discretionary Data fields may be found with the discretionary data

    Track 3 (ISO 4909)

    Encoding Key

    A Field Separator (FS) must be used if an optional field is not used

    The track formats used in this document are based on ISO Standards, however, other formats may be used. Contact your card issuer for your exact requirements

    Determine what software will be installed on the host and how it will be configured. Software can include the operating system, transaction processing software, security software, and so on. If teams other than the software development team will be involved in preliminary device testing, MagTek recommends the solution development team provide a smoke test harness early in the development process to allow basic testing (for example, communication adapter testing). In addition, be sure to plan for any additional support required by the software, such as software licenses and network connections.
  • Determine how the device will be physically presented to the cardholder. If the device is mounted, make sure there is adequate clearance for cardholders to swipe, insert, and tap. If the solution design includes metal objects anywhere near the device, including metal enclosures, make sure that at all points the metal is no further forward than 15mm below the face of the device. Proximity to metal can adversely affect the device’s performance.

  • Determine how the device should be configured and specify that configuration when ordering the device. A full list of configurable options is documented in DynaProx Programmer’s Manual.

  • Select and configure a secure workstation that advanced operators will use to configure and/or update the device. The workstation must be configured as follows:

    • Available USB port.

    • A secure means of obtaining files, either via the network (such as SFTP) or via removable media, such as USB flash drives. This is required for installing software tools, copying firmware files, etc. If you are using Magensa Services, make sure the secure workstation has an internet connection and has all the required Magensa Remote Services software components installed.

    • installed, which advanced operators can use to configure and test the device.

    • installed, which advanced operators can use to update the device’s firmware.

    • Determine the final set of tools advanced operators will use to configure, test, and update the device. This documentation uses the as an example for configuring the device; it can be used for initial pre-deployment testing and development, and as sample code showing how to communicate with the device, but the full solution may call for customized, solution-specific software for configuring the device and updating firmware.

    • Determine how to inspect devices upon arrival, upon installation, and periodically during live usage, to ensure malicious individuals have not tampered with them. Details about inspection are provided in .

    • Develop procedures for maintaining the device(s). Detailed guidance is provided in .

    • Determine how to train operators. For example, training may include information extracted from , , and .

    • Review the device’s PCI Security Policy, posted to the PCI web site under Approved PIN Transaction Security (PTS) Devices, for additional information about using the device securely.

  • Logistical Planning

    Available Models and Options
    Available Models and Options

    Planning and Preparation

    What to review before deployment: host and operating-system compatibility (Windows, Android, and iOS via USB iAP2), USB/USB iAP2 and RS-232 connectivity and power options, and mounting for kiosks, unattended terminals, and the optional countertop stand.

    Handling and Storage

    Safe handling, operating and storage environment limits (including the IP66/IK08 ratings for harsh conditions), ESD precautions, and tamper-evidence checks that keep the secure module valid.

    Installation

    Step-by-step physical setup — mounting to ATM/kiosk points or the optional stand, cabling and cable management, connecting to the host, and powering on.

    Configuration

    How to configure device settings and behavior, connection modes, and security/Passcode Lock options (manual entry, QR code, and contactless workflows), plus firmware and configuration updates.

    Operation

    How to run transactions day to day — contactless tap and optional barcode/QR flows — and the device responses and audio cues to expect.

    Maintenance

    Cleaning and care, routine tamper inspection, and basic troubleshooting to keep the device in service.

    Developing Custom Software

    Where developers go next: the Commands Programmer's Manual, SDKs and connection protocols (USB HID, USB iAP2, RS-232), and Magensa gateway integration for decryption and processing.

    Appendices

    Reference material — technical specifications, standards and compliance (contactless EMV 3.0, PCI PTS POI 6.x), part numbers, and status/error-code references.

    Need More Help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    • 📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)

    • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

    Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    Introduction

    Planning and Preparation

    What to review before deployment: host and operating-system compatibility (Windows, Android, iOS), USB and Bluetooth® LE connectivity options, and power, accessory, and mounting/enclosure considerations.

    Handling and Storage

    Safe handling, operating and storage environment limits, ESD precautions, and tamper-evidence checks that keep the device's secure module valid.

    Installation

    Step-by-step physical setup — mounting, connecting to the host over USB or pairing over Bluetooth® LE, powering on, and verifying the connection.

    Configuration

    How to configure device settings and behavior, connection modes, and security/Passcode Lock options, plus updating firmware, CAPKs, and EMV/application settings.

    Operation

    How to run transactions day to day — the tap, dip, swipe, and optional barcode/QR flows — and the device responses to expect.

    User Interface

    The meaning of the device's LED indicators and audible (beeper) cues, and how operators and cardholders interact with the reader during a transaction.

    Maintenance

    Cleaning and care, routine tamper inspection, and basic troubleshooting to keep the device in service.

    Developing Custom Software

    Where developers go next: the Commands Programmer's Manual, SDKs and connection protocols (USB HID, USB iAP2, Bluetooth® LE), and Magensa gateway integration for decryption and processing.

    Appendices

    Reference material — technical specifications, standards and compliance (PCI PTS 6.x SCR, EMV), part numbers, and status/error-code references.

    Need More Help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    • 📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)

    • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

    Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    Introduction

    FCC INFORMATION

    CANADIAN DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

    INNOVATION, SCIENCE AND ECONOMIC DEVELOPEMENT CANADA (ISED)

    CE STANDARDS

    EU STATEMENT

    UKCA STATEMENT

    AUSTRALIA / NEW ZEALAND STATEMENT

    UL/CSA

    ROHS STATEMENT

    PCI STATEMENT

    SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

    Need More Help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    • 📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)

    • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

    Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    https://www.magtek.com/Content/DocumentationFiles/D998200404.pdf
    https://www.magtek.com/Content/DocumentationFiles/D998200410.pdf
    https://www.magtek.com/Content/DocumentationFiles/D998200411.pdf
    https://www.magtek.com/Content/DocumentationFiles/D998200412.pdf
    https://www.magtek.com/Content/DocumentationFiles/D998200413.pdf
    https://www.magtek.com/Content/DocumentationFiles/D998200475.pdf
    https://www.magtek.com/Content/DocumentationFiles/D998200476.pdf
    https://www.magtek.com/Content/DocumentationFiles/D998200477.pdf
    https://www.magtek.com/Content/DocumentationFiles/D998200478.pdf
    https://www.magtek.com/Content/DocumentationFiles/D998200479.pdf
    SUPPORT@MAGTEK.COM
    https://www.magtek.com
    https://forum.magtek.com

    DynaFlex II PED

    Download the software for developing with and managing the DynaFlex II PED PIN-entry reader. This page brings together the MagTek Universal SDK (MTUSDK) for MMS devices on Android, iOS, Java, Linux, and Windows, along with the MagneFlex Browser and browser apps, demo and sample applications, MagneFlex middleware, and the Reader Management System clients for enterprise firmware and configuration updates.

    API/SDK

    Description

    Summary

    A web console that accepts an OID and command data and returns the data to use for MTUSDK configuration commands on DynaFlex devices.

    The MagneFlex Browser is a full function browser this free development tool can be white-labelled and provides a turnkey integration solution for web applications, working with MagTek hardware and services. Sites developed in HTML 5 with device responsive views will work seamlessly in this browser allowing an app to respond to devices whether they are tablets or phones.

    Device Inspection Document

    DynaFlex II Go is a secure card reader authenticator in a small form factor that is ready to accept tap, swipe, and dip payments in a wide variety of retail environments. The small form factor is ready for countertop and mobile devices with USB or Bluetooth® LE connection. Start accepting mobile wallets including Samsung® Pay, Google® Pay and Apple® Pay via NFC Contactless or accept card payments via EMV® Contactless, EMV Contact Chip, and magnetic stripe.

    Check the overall form factor for signs of attempted entry or tampering. The form factor is a smooth shell. The seam between the top and bottom shells are molded together. There are no additional electronics or wires. Any breaks in the plastic, scuffs, or damage could be signs of physical tampering and should be reported. Look for any added components, size, or weight: Dimensions: 2.76 in.x2.57 in.x0.79 in. (70.10mm x 65.3mm x20.1mm) DynaFlex II Go (w/BCR and Bluetooth LE): 92 grams, DynaFlex II Go (with Bluetooth LE): 90 grams.

    Top of Device: This is the location of the EMV Chip Card insert position and magstripe swipe card reader slot.

    Payment Methods: Directional icons for magstripe, EMV chip insert, and contactless tap landing pad are printed on the device front.

    Chip Card Insertion Slot: The card slot for the EMV Contact Chip reader is a smooth, unobstructed path. Other than the contact points that read the chip there are no electronics, mechanics, or wires in the path.

    Package Inspection Document, Without Stand

    DynaFlex II Go products are PCI PTS v6.x SCR, certified. The packaging is designed to be tamper evident and the closure uses security tape. Any attempt to open the package shows signs of tampering. This document explains how to detect tampering.

    The basic form factor of the package is a folded white cardboard box with a cardboard insert where the device is nestled into Korrvu plastic wrap packaging. There are no rips or added materials on the package other than product and Lot labels. The package only has one color ink printed on the package: black. The box is made with corrugated white cardboard.

    Certification Compliance Logos: Industry certification logos showing compliance are printed on the back of the package as shown. Manufacturer address is shown.

    The front cover of the package lists the product name, MagneSafe Security information, PCI revision information, product read capability icons, QR Codes, and description.

    On the left side of the package is printed a list of the package contents and the product label is adhered.

    Developing Custom Software

    Custom host software uses the same underlying device command set for all DynaProx product connection types. This section provides high-level information about communicating with the device via the various physical connection types in various software development frameworks, and provides pointers to available SDKs, which include sample code. Product documentation and SDKs are available for download by searching for the product name on .

    MagTek provides convenient SDKs and corresponding documentation for many programming languages and operating systems. The API libraries included in the SDKs wrap the details of the connection in an interface that conceptually parallels the device’s internal operation, freeing software developers to focus on the business logic, without having to deal with the complexities of platform APIs for connecting to the various available connection types, communicating using the various available protocols, and parsing the various available data formats. Information about using MagTek wrapper APIs is available in separate documentation, including:

    Cryptographic check digits (optional) - 6

  • Discretionary Data

  • 7 bits per character

    79 alphanumeric characters

    0.110"

    ABA

    75

    5 bits per character

    40 numeric characters

    0.110"

    THRIFT

    210

    5 bits per character

    107 numeric characters

    LRC

    Orange characters identify control characters

    Orange characters identify control characters

    DynaFlex, DynaProx Test Utility
    DynaFlex, DynaProx Firmware Upload Utility
    DynaFlex, DynaProx Test Utility
    About Inspection
    Maintenance
    Configuration
    Operation
    Maintenance
    www.pcisecuritystandards.org
    feedback@magtek.com
    feedback@magtek.com
    feedback@magtek.com
    feedback@magtek.com
    MTUSDK Omni, iOS
    Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
  • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

  • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

  • DO NOT remove any of the covers or guards that are fastened with screws. There are no user-serviceable areas within these covers.

  • DO NOT override or “cheat” electrical or mechanical interlock devices.

  • DO NOT use EC3000 supplies or cleaning materials for other than their intended purposes.

  • DO NOT operate the equipment if you or anyone else have noticed unusual noises or odors.

  • Consider the following before operating the ExpressCard 3000:

    • Connect the EC3000 to a properly grounded AC power socket-outlet. If in doubt, have the socket-outlet checked by a qualified electrician. Improper connection of the device’s grounding conductor creates a risk of electric shock.

    • Place the EC3000 on a solid surface that can safely support the device’s weight plus the weight of a person leaning against it (such as a service technician).

    • Be careful when moving or relocating the device. Use proper lifting techniques.

    • Use materials and supplies specifically designed for MagTek devices. Using unsuitable materials may result in poor performance, and in some cases may be hazardous.

    📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)
  • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

  • Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation! feedback@magtek.com

    support@magtek.com
    MagTek Universal SDK Programmer’s Manual (Microsoft C++ )
  • MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices Programmer’s Manual (Java)

  • MagTek Universal SDK Programmer’s Manual (Android)

  • The documentation is bundled with the SDKs themselves, which include:

    • MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices (Windows)

    • MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices (Android)

    The SDKs and corresponding documentation include:

    • Functions for sending the direct commands described in this manual

    • Wrappers for commonly used commands that further simplify development

    • Sample source code to demonstrate how to communicate with the device using the direct commands described in this manual

    To download the SDKs and documentation, search developer.magtek.com for “SDK” and select the SDK and documentation for the programming languages and platforms you need or contact MagTek Support Services for assistance.

    In addition to the SDK API libraries, software developers also have the option to revert to direct communication with the device using libraries using the operating system’s native USB and serial port libraries. For example, custom software written in Visual Basic or Visual C++ may make API calls to the standard Windows USB HID driver. For more information about sending commands directly, see DynaFlex / DynaProx Programmer’s Manual.

    developer.magtek.com
    MagTek Universal SDK Programmer’s Manual (Microsoft .NET)

    A sample iOS application that works with the MTUSDK to demonstrate communication with MagTek card readers and provide a user experience that simulates a transaction.

    BCR Utility for BCR Devices

    A utility for demonstrating and testing barcode-reading operations on DynaFlex BCR and DynaProx BCR devices (models equipped with a barcode reader).

    MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices, (Android)

    An Android Software Development Kit that provides tools, a sample application, sample code, and documentation for developers creating solutions for MagTek MMS devices on Android hosts.

    MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices (iOS)

    An iOS SDK that provides the necessary tools, sample application, sample code, and documentation for developers building iOS solutions for MagTek MMS devices.

    MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices - (Java)

    Contains the necessary tools for software developers who want to create software solutions for MagTek devices to a Windows based host using Java Virtual Machine.

    MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices - (Linux)

    A Linux-based SDK that includes sample applications, code, and documentation for building software solutions for MagTek MMS devices on Linux hosts.

    MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices - (Windows)

    A Windows SDK that provides sample code, documentation, and a demo application to help developers integrate MagTek MMS devices into Windows-based host applications.

    Description

    Summary

    MagneFlex Sky, Browser App, Android

    A full-featured Android browser designed for app development, enabling web apps to communicate with hardware without needing plugins, available on Google Play and the Amazon app store.

    MagTek Reader Management System, iOS

    An iOS app that is part of a suite of tools for remotely configuring and updating a large number of geographically dispersed MagTek readers across an enterprise, including the DynaFlex II Go and other Dyna devices.

    MagTek Reader Management System, Windows App

    Description

    Summary

    EMV Updates Utility - (Web)

    A configuration utility for a variety of DynaFlex and DynaProx devices used to change or update EMV configurations, run demo EMV transactions, upload bitmap images, and parse TLV data.

    MagneFlex Prism – Navy/Blue/Sky – Demo

    A demo web page designed to illustrate the functionality of the MagneFlex Browser, which can be launched on Android, iOS, and Windows versions of the browser.

    MTUSDK Omni, Android

    Description

    Summary

    MagneFlex Navy, Browser, MFX 2.0 for Windows x64

    A full-function HTML browser application for Windows x64, featuring a developer mode for debugging JavaScript, improved HTML/framework rendering, and tabbed browsing.

    MagneFlex Navy, Browser, MFX 2.0 for Windows x86

    A full-function HTML browser application for Windows x86, featuring the same developer tools and modern rendering capabilities as the x64 version.

    Description

    Summary

    MagneFlex Powder Middleware

    A lightweight middleware application that manages communications between a POS application and the hardware for DynaFlex and DynaProx products, streamlining data processing.

    Apps

    Demo Programs

    Magneflex Browser

    MagneFlex Middleware

    Need More Help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    • 📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)

    • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

    Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    OID Converter Console (Web)

    A Windows application that automates the configuration and firmware updates for a wide range of MagTek readers, including all DynaFlex II models, across an enterprise deployment.

    A sample Android application provided with the MTUSDK that demonstrates communication with MagTek card readers (including the DynaFlex II Go) and simulates a transaction process.

    Swipe Path: The swipe path is smooth. The only moving part is the spring-mounted read head that depresses into the device as the card’s magnetic stripe makes contact with the read head. There are no mechanics, electronics, or wires in the swipe path.

    Front Face Contactless Landing Zone: The Contactless landing zone is a smooth front cover with no moving parts and only the contactless symbol in the landing zone. Contactless indicator mark orientation may vary depending on installation.

    Front Face (BCR ONLY) Barcode Reader: In barcode reader models (BCR), a barcode reader is along the right-facing side of the reader with a QR Code icon and directional arrow.

    Front Face LED Feedback: There are four LED lights. These provide signals to the user. See installation and operation manual for complete LED signaling.

    Front Face Devices Without Barcode Reader: These devices will have no lens or barcode icons.

    Right-facing Side of Device Pushbutton: There is a tactile button with no other extraneous parts.

    Bottom of Device USB-C Cable: There is a USB-C receptacle on bottom of the device. The USB-C cable is provided to power and charge. Ensure there are no extraneous cables. (Cable not shown to scale.)

    Back Side of Device Product Label: The product label is located on the underside of the device. The Serial Number, Rev, Date, Part number (PN), and Hardware PN (HW) are listed as appropriate.

    Back Side of Device Certificate Logos: Imprints in the plastic form factor of certification logos and patent information are listed.

    To check for PCI Validation check the Hardware and Firmware ID. Hardware ID is printed on the label. The Firmware ID is accessible via the device. Go to the PCI compliance web page and search for MagTek, and find the product name, DynaFlex II Go. Compare the Hardware ID and Firmware ID: https://www.pcisecuritystandards.org/assessors_and_solutions/ pin_transaction_devices

    As part of your inspection, include the following for your device inspection audit:

    • Be certain to have a list of the devices and include the details listed on the product label.

    • It may be helpful to take photos of the front, back, and sides of each device.

    Be certain to check device part numbers, serial numbers, and IDs and check physical connections. Use the chart below as a checklist to inspect the device for signs of tampering.

    Are there signs of tampering:

    Signs of tampering

    Site Inspection

    YES

    NO

    FCC INFORMATION

    This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

    CANADIAN DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

    This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.

    Le présent appareil numérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la classe B prescrites dans le Réglement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le ministère des Communications du Canada.

    This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

    Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conformé à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

    INDUSTRY CANADA (IC) RSS

    This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

    Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

    CUR/UR

    This product is recognized per Underwriter Laboratories and Canadian Underwriter Laboratories 1950.

    CE STANDARDS

    Testing for compliance with CE requirements was performed by an independent laboratory. The unit under test was found compliant with standards established for Class B devices.

    EU STATEMENT

    Hereby, MagTek Inc. declares that the radio equipment types Wideband Transmission System (802.11 wireless and Bluetooth® Low Energy), and Non-Specific Short Range Device (contactless) are in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declarations of conformity is available at the following Internet addresses: https://www.magtek.com/content/documentationfiles/d998200650.pdf

    Safety

    This product has been tested to IEC 62368-1 -Audio/Video, information and communication technology equipment - Part 1: General Requirements plus U.S., Canadian, Australian & New Zealand National Deviations by an ISO 17025 Accredited Testing Laboratory.

    ROHS STATEMENT

    When ordered as RoHS compliant, this product meets the Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EEE) Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive (EU) 2015/863 amending Annex II to Directive 2011/65/EU. The marking is clearly recognizable, either as written words like “Pb-free,” “lead-free,” or as another clear symbol ( Pb ).

    PCI STATEMENT

    PCI Security Standards Council, LLC (“PCI SSC”) has approved this PIN Transaction Security Device to be in compliance with PCI SSC’s PIN Security Requirements.

    When granted, PCI SSC approval is provided by PCI SSC to ensure certain security and operational characteristics important to the achievement of PCI SSC’s goals, but PCI SSC approval does not under any circumstances include any endorsement or warranty regarding the functionality, quality or performance of any particular product or service. PCI SSC does not warrant any products or services provided by third parties. PCI SSC approval does not under any circumstances include or imply any product warranties from PCI SSC, including, without limitation, any implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for purpose, or non-infringement, all of which are expressly disclaimed by PCI SSC. All rights and remedies regarding products and services which have received PCI SSC approval shall be provided by the party providing such products or services, and not by PCI SSC.

    UKCA STATEMENT

    Hereby, MagTek Inc. declares that the radio equipment types Wideband Transmission System (Wireless LAN and Bluetooth Low Energy), and Non-Specific Short Range Device (contactless) are in compliance with Radio Equipment Regulations 2017 Directive S.I.2017:1206. The full text of the UKCA declarations of conformity is available at the following Internet addresses: https://www.magtek.com/content/documentationfiles/d998200651.pdf

    Overall Form Factor

    Additional Details and Checklist

    PCI Device Validation

    Notice: If there is forced entry, the security switches built into the electronics will be tripped. If they are tripped the sensitive data such as encryption keys and certificates are cleared as part of security measures mandated by PCI and the device will not be available to make transactions.

    If the security switches have been tripped, DynaFlex II Go Products cannot be repaired in the field and must go back to the factory for repair. Follow return material authorization (RMA) procedures. User must report all signs of tampering as per standard protocol.

    Compliance

    Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

    • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

    Notice: If there is forced entry, the security switches built into the electronics will be tripped. If they are tripped the sensitive data such as encryption keys and certificates are cleared as part of security measures mandated by PCI and the device will not be available to make transactions. If the security switches have been tripped, DynaFlex II Go Products cannot be repaired in the field and must go back to the factory for repair. Follow return material authorization (RMA) procedures. User must report all signs of tampering as per standard protocol.

    CAUTION: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by MagTek could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email:

    The right side of the package shows the storage requirements and CAUTION content.

    The front of the package lists the product name, category, PCI certification, and Security Tape.

    Security tape wraps onto the bottom of the package from the front flap of the package.

    Adhered

    Here security tape is applied and secured. Wrapping front to bottom of package.

    Tape

    Tape is removed VOID and OPENED appear on tape.

    Package

    Security tape wraps onto the bottom of the package from the front flap of the package.

    Bottom

    Security Tape: The Security Tape wraps from the front flap to the bottom of the package. Make certain there are no signs of tampering.

    Lot Label: The lot label is placed on the bottom of the box. Make certain there are no false labels added or tampering.

    Inside

    DynaFlex II Go products are nestled inside the package with Korrvu packaging that uses cling wrap to hold the device securely in place for transit. The cling wrap is attached to an insert that has thumb-hole cuts on either side to make it easier to remove from the outer packaging. The package includes the device, cable(s), device inspection document, and quick installation guide.

    To check for PCI Validation check the Hardware and Firmware ID. Hardware ID is printed on the label. The Firmware ID is accessible via the device. Go to the PCI compliance web page and search for MagTek, and find the product name, DynaFlex II Go. Compare the Hardware ID and Firmware ID: https:// www.pcisecuritystandards.org/assessors_and_solutions/pin_transaction_devices

    As part of your inspection, include the following for your device inspection audit:

    • Be certain to have a list of the devices and include the details listed on the product label.

    • It may be helpful to take photos of the front, back, and sides of each device.

    Be certain to check device part numbers, serial numbers, and IDs and check physical connections. Use the chart below as a checklist to inspect the device for signs of tampering.

    Are there signs of tampering:

    Signs of tampering

    YES

    NO

    Overall Form Factor

    Back of Package

    Front Cover of Package

    Left Side of Package

    Right Side of Package

    Front of Package

    Security Tape

    Additional Details and Checklist

    PCI Device Validation

    NOTICE: Follow RMA procedures. User should report all signs of tampering as per standard protocol.

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email:

    DynaFlex II Go

    This page provides access to the essential software resources for developing with and managing the DynaFlex II Go secure card reader. Here you will find Software Development Kits (SDKs) for integrating the device into applications across Android, iOS, and Windows platforms. Additionally, you can download utility programs for device demonstration and configuration, as well as specialized browser applications and the Reader Management System (RMS) for remote, large-scale device management.

    DynaFlex II Go Downloads

    API/SDK

    Description

    Summary

    A sample console application for Linux that demonstrates how to update DynaFlex II Go device firmware, update production firmware via RS2 web service, and update EMV configurations (tags and CAPK) from an XML file.

    The MagneFlex Browser is a full function browser this free development tool can be white-labelled and provides a turnkey integration solution for web applications, working with MagTek hardware and services. Sites developed in HTML 5 with device responsive views will work seamlessly in this browser allowing an app to respond to devices whether they are tablets or phones.

    oDynamo

    This page provides essential software resources for developing with and managing the oDynamo secure card reader, including platform-specific SDKs for integration across Linux, Windows, .NET, and Java, as well as utility programs for device demonstration, remote configuration, and enterprise‑scale firmware and setting updates.

    API/SDK

    Description

    Summary

    ​​

    A sample code package that demonstrates how to communicate with the oDynamo reader using the MagTek Common Message Structure (MTCMS) in a Linux environment.

    feedback@magtek.com
    MTUSDK Omni, iOS

    Handling and Storage

    Caution: Proper handling of the device throughout delivery, assembly, shipping, installation, usage, and maintenance is very important. Not following the guidelines in this document could damage the device, render it inoperable, and/or violate the conditions of the warranty.

    Handling to Avoid Damage

    Upon receiving the device, inspect it to make sure it originated from an authentic source and has not been tampered with. For details, see DynaProx / DynaProx BCR Device Inspection.

    From device delivery through assembly, shipping, installation, usage, and maintenance, the device must not be exposed to conditions outside the ratings in Appendix A: Technical Specifications.

    If the device is exposed to cold temperatures, adjust it to warmer temperatures gradually to avoid condensation, which can interfere with the operation of the device or cause permanent damage.

    Do not drop or shake the device.

    For information about ongoing maintenance of the device, such as cleaning, see Maintenance.

    Handling to Avoid Accidental Tamper

    DynaProx products implement active tamper detection, which uses a small amount of electricity even when the device is completely powered off. When unpowered by an external power supply, the device powers its active tamper detection circuitry using its non-rechargeable backup battery. This provides 5 years of backup shelf life across the entire life of the device. If the backup battery is allowed to completely discharge, the device’s tamper detection engages and locks down the device, and it must be returned to the manufacturer to reset.

    To avoid accidental tamper events and to optimally condition the battery, follow these precautions:

    • Temperature is the most critical factor in extending battery life and preserving battery charge. Store the device at the lowest reasonable temperatures within its specified storage temperature range (see Appendix A Technical Specifications). Storing at temperatures between -30°C to 85°C (-22°F to 185°F) – DynaProx BCR -30°C to 70°C (-22°F to 158°F).

    • Do not drop or shake the device.

    • Do not attempt to disassemble the device.

    Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
  • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

  • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

  • 📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)
  • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

  • Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation! feedback@magtek.com

    Form Factor - check overall form factor

    Front

    4 LEDs

    EMV/NFC Contactless landing zone

    Barcode reader (BCR models only)

    Printing and icons

    Overall form factor

    Sides and Top

    Magnetic stripe swipe path

    EMV contact card slot

    Form factor

    Right Facing Side: Push Button

    Bottom Side: USB-C port

    Cables and charging cradle

    USB-C cable and port

    Back

    Certificate logos imprinted

    Form factor

    Cable connection

    Pushbutton

    Labels

    support@magtek.com
    📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)
  • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

  • Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation! feedback@magtek.com

    Form Factor - check overall form factor

    Front

    Check form factor

    Look for signs of tamper

    Check printing and no added labels

    Left, Right, and Back Sides

    Check form factor

    Look for signs of tamper

    Check printing and no added labels

    Check product label

    Front Flap

    Check Security Tape

    Look for signs of tamper

    Check printing and no added labels

    Check form factor

    Bottom

    Check Security Tape

    Look for signs of tamper

    Check printing

    Check form factor

    Check lot Label

    support@magtek.com

    A sample iOS application that works with the MTUSDK to demonstrate communication with MagTek card readers and provide a user experience that simulates a transaction.

    MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices, (Android)

    An Android Software Development Kit that provides tools, a sample application, sample code, and documentation for developers creating solutions for MagTek MMS devices on Android hosts.

    MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices - (Linux)

    A Linux-based SDK that includes sample applications, code, and documentation for building software solutions for MagTek MMS devices on Linux hosts.

    MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices - (Windows)

    A Windows SDK that provides sample code, documentation, and a demo application to help developers integrate MagTek MMS devices into Windows-based host applications.

    MagTek Universal SDK for MMS Devices (iOS)

    An iOS SDK that provides the necessary tools, sample application, sample code, and documentation for developers building iOS solutions for MagTek MMS devices.

    Description

    Summary

    MagneFlex Sky, Browser App, Android

    A full-featured Android browser designed for app development, enabling web apps to communicate with hardware without needing plugins, available on Google Play and the Amazon app store.

    MagTek Reader Management System, iOS

    An iOS app that is part of a suite of tools for remotely configuring and updating a large number of geographically dispersed MagTek readers across an enterprise, including the DynaFlex II Go and other Dyna devices.

    MagTek Reader Management System, Windows App

    Description

    Summary

    EMV Updates Utility - (Web)

    A configuration utility for a variety of DynaFlex and DynaProx devices used to change or update EMV configurations, run demo EMV transactions, upload bitmap images, and parse TLV data.

    MagneFlex Prism – Navy/Blue/Sky – Demo

    A demo web page designed to illustrate the functionality of the MagneFlex Browser, which can be launched on Android, iOS, and Windows versions of the browser.

    MTUSDK Omni, Android

    Description

    Summary

    MagneFlex Navy, Browser, MFX 2.0 for Windows x64

    A full-function HTML browser application for Windows x64, featuring a developer mode for debugging JavaScript, improved HTML/framework rendering, and tabbed browsing.

    MagneFlex Navy, Browser, MFX 2.0 for Windows x86

    A full-function HTML browser application for Windows x86, featuring the same developer tools and modern rendering capabilities as the x64 version.

    Description

    Summary

    MagneFlex Powder Middleware

    A lightweight middleware application that manages communications between a POS application and the hardware for DynaFlex and DynaProx products, streamlining data processing.

    Apps

    Demo Programs

    Magneflex Browser

    MagneFlex Middleware

    Need More Help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    • 📞 Phone: 1-800-788-6835 (US) | +1-562-546-6616 (International)

    • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 6:00 AM - 5:00 PM PST

    Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Official Site:

    • 💬 Developer Forum:

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    Reader Management System, Linux, Sample Code

    A Windows application that automates the configuration and firmware updates for a wide range of MagTek readers, including all DynaFlex II models, across an enterprise deployment.

    A sample Android application provided with the MTUSDK that demonstrates communication with MagTek card readers (including the DynaFlex II Go) and simulates a transaction process.

    ​oDynamo, MTCMS, Windows .NET​

    A Software Development Kit (SDK) that includes tools, documentation, a demo application, and sample code for developers creating Windows .NET software solutions that include an oDynamo reader.

    ​oDynamo, MTCMS, Windows C++ / JAVA​

    A developer resource containing instructions and content for software developers who want to create .NET or Java software solutions that include a MagTek Common Message Structure (MTCMS) device connected to a Windows PC.

    ​oDynamo, MTCMS, Windows Universal Windows Platform (Web)​

    A developer resource that provides instructions for creating Windows software solutions that include a MagTek Common Message Structure (MTCMS) device connected to a Windows PC, specifically for the Universal Windows Platform (UWP).

    Description

    Summary

    ​MagTek Reader Config - Remote Services (RS2)​

    A remote services tool used to perform reconfiguration of oDynamo devices already deployed in the field (contact MagTek support before performing updates).

    ​MagTek Reader Management System, Windows App​

    A suite of apps and source code that automates the ability to configure and update a large quantity of geographically separated MagTek readers across an enterprise deployment, including the oDynamo and other Dyna devices.

    Description

    Summary

    ​Demo Program, USB Swipe & Insert Reader​

    A program that demonstrates card reading for USB HID and keyboard emulation readers, allows users to send configuration commands manually or via text file, and includes the demo application's source code to assist developers.

    ​MagTek RMS Sample Code​

    A sample code package that demonstrates how to use the oDynamo Reader Management System.

    Description

    Summary

    ​MagTek EMV Configuration​

    A software utility used for validating the EMV configuration (including EMV tags and Certificate Authority Public Keys) of a MagTek oDynamo or DynaWave reader.

    Apps

    Demo Program

    EMV Tags & CAPK

    Need More Help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    • 📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)

    • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

    Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    oDynamo, MTCMS, Linux (Web), Sample Code

    Installation and Operation Manual

    A complete reference for setting up and operating the DynaFlex II PED, covering inspection and handling, installation, day-to-day operation, maintenance, custom software development, and supporting appendices.

    Reference Sections

    Reference Section

    Information Available

    Overview of the DynaFlex II PED and how to use this manual.

    feedback@magtek.com

    Inspection, Handling and Storage

    Guidance on unpacking, inspecting, and storing the device before deployment.

    Installation

    Steps for physically installing and connecting the device.

    Operation

    Instructions for powering on and using the device's core functions.

    Maintenance

    Cleaning, upkeep, and troubleshooting procedures to keep the device running properly.

    Developing Custom Software

    Guidance for developers building custom applications for the device.

    Appendices

    Supplemental reference material, including specifications and additional technical details.

    Need More Help

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    • 📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)

    • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

    Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    Introduction
    https://www.magtek.com
    https://forum.magtek.com
    MTUSDK Omni, iOS
    feedback@magtek.com

    Operation

    About Operating Modes

    While in use, the DynaFlex II family of products switch between distinct operating modes. It is crucial for operators to comprehend these modes to effectively operate the device:

    • Powered Off Mode is the shipping and storage mode of the device. Operators would not generally use this mode during a work shift or during off-shift recharging. It occurs when the operator holds the pushbutton for more than 8 seconds (or more than 12 seconds to force immediate power off without a proper shutdown sequence), or if the device’s battery is critically low and the device is not connected to a USB power source. In this mode, the device consumes practically no power. To move the device from Powered Off Mode to Active Mode, press the pushbutton for one second with the battery charged, or connect the device to USB power. If the device is already connected to USB power when it enters Powered Off Mode, it automatically powers back on.

    • Reset Mode is a transient mode where the device first transitions to Powered Off Mode, then automatically powers back on. It occurs when the operator presses the recessed switch, or the host sends the Reset Device command, or the device automatically performs a daily security reset.

    • USB Suspend Mode occurs when the USB host that is providing power to the device sends a USB Suspend control event to the device to conserve power. The device responds by powering off nearly all its modules including the display and listening for the USB host to send a USB Resume control event. To move the device from USB, Suspend Mode to Active Mode, the host software must open a USB connection to communicate with the device, which signals the operating system that the device is in active use and should be allowed to draw full power from the USB port. It is not necessary for the host software to send commands to the device at that time.

    • Active Mode is the device’s normal “awake” state when it is in use. In this mode, the touchscreen display and LEDs are powered on, and the device is ready to receive commands from the host. This mode can be divided into substates like Active/Host Not Connected, Active/Host Connected, Active/Host Communicating, Active/Armed for Read, Active/Reading, and so on. These substates differ in the amount of power they consume and are mostly under the control of the host software. To move the device from Active Mode to Powered Off mode, press and hold the pushbutton for 8 seconds. If the device does not respond, continue holding the pushbutton for longer than 12 seconds to force immediate power off without a proper shutdown sequence. To move the device from ActiveMode to Reset Mode, press the recessed switch.

    During normal operation, the operator initiates a transaction from the host, and the cardholder interacts with the device. Devices with a touchscreen display provide on-screen prompts and interactive features such as buttons and signature capture.

    Transaction types may include sales, refunds, voids, authorization, new accounts, teller window applications, checking, savings, mortgages, retail transactions, or any other type of transaction where there is interaction between the cardholder and the operator. For each transaction type, the host software can direct the device to prompt the cardholder for any combination of magnetic stripe swipe, EMV contact card insertion, and/or contactless payment tap, and the transaction flow on the device may differ depending on what the host software specifies and what the cardholder does. Section 4.8 Using the Reader provides examples of the cardholder experience for each type of payment. Figure 4-1 shows a typical point of sale (POS) transaction sequence.

    If the device cannot read payment data, the host software may direct it to prompt the cardholder to repeat the action or request the cardholder revert to a different form of payment (such as using the magnetic stripe reader as a fallback instead of the chip card insertion slot).

    Figure 4-1 - Typical Transaction Sequence

    DynaFlex II provides four RGB LEDs directly below the chip card insertion slot (see section 1.5 About DynaFlex II Components), numbered LED1 through LED4, which report the device’s current operating status.

    • The meaning of each LED depends on the device’s operating mode. See section 4.1 About Operating Modes and Table 4-1 below. Most of the time, operators will check the device’s status using the LEDs when it is in Active Mode while the device is not performing a transaction.

    • LED colors have specific meanings, as described in Table 4-2. They are based on international conventions for traffic light colors, with additional colors reserved for unusual / special cases.

    • LED blinking patterns have specific meanings as well, as described in Table 4-3. A blinking LED means the device is actively doing something to change the state that the LED is indicating and solid indicates a persistent state that would require an operator or cardholder to take action to change. One major exception is a device-wide functional failure state, such as a tamper state, where all LEDs flash urgently to call the attention of an advanced operator to intervene.

    In this manual, specific combinations of LED colors and blinking patterns are described in more detail in the sections where they are relevant and use the same icons in the tables below to indicate color and blinking patterns. For example, information about how the LEDs show the device’s connection status is in section 3.2 Connecting to a Host.

    This section applies only to DynaFlex II PED models, which are equipped with a display and touchscreen. When using a DynaFlex II model that does not have a display, the device reports ongoing status to the host, which must present any necessary prompts and status information to the operator and / or the cardholder.

    When the device is powered on, in Active mode, and idle (not performing a transaction or displaying host-driven user interface prompts), it displays Welcome or a custom graphic if it is configured to do so. If the host software is designed to receive and respond to cardholder input messages, pressing any area on the touchscreen when it is idle may trigger the host to perform an operation, such as starting a transaction. For more information about custom graphics, see DynaFlex and DynaFlex Pro Programmer’s Manual (COMMANDS).

    WLAN enabled devices also report current status in a set of icons at the top of the Welcome screen. Table 4-4 below shows the icons and describes their meanings. For example, in Figure 4-2, the device is connected to a USB host and wireless access point, TLS is enabled, the battery level is OK, the device is charging, and it is idle, waiting for the host to initiate a transaction.

    Figure 4-2 - Welcome Page Examples

    The device may show text other than “Welcome” when it is Active / idle under certain conditions:

    • OFFLINE/Tampered: indicates the device has detected an attempt to tamper with it (for example, physical tampering, out-of-spec temperature range, electrical attack). If this occurs, remove the device from service and set it aside in a secure location for possible forensic analysis, and contact the manufacturer or your reseller for support. This mode can only be reset in the manufacturing facility.

    • OFFLINE/Tamper not active: indicates the device’s tamper detection system is not activated. The device is not configured properly. If this occurs, remove the device from service and contact the manufacturer or your reseller for support.

    • OFFLINE/Security not activated: indicates the device’s data security features have not been activated. The device is not configured properly. If this occurs, remove the device from service and contact the manufacturer or your reseller for support.

    While powering on, the touchscreen briefly displays a page of information about the device, including the installed firmware part numbers and versions and other identifying information. To determine a device’s PCI certification status, compare the contents of this screen to the device’s listing on Approved PTS Devices. Note that in PCI listings, lowercase “x” is a wildcard meaning ‘any single character.

    Figure 4-3 - Device Information Screen

    To view details pertinent to the device’s PCI certification status on WLAN enabled devices - including the installed firmware part numbers and versions as well as other identifying information (see Figure 4-4) complete the following actions:

    While on the Welcome screen, press the Pushbutton and hold for 3 beeps to access the Settings menu, then select Firmware and Main to return to the Welcome screen, select Back and Exit.

    Figure 4-4 - Device Information Screen for WLAN device

    1.1.1 Connection Status Page

    In addition to the icons at the top of the display, WLAN enabled devices have a WLAN Status screen that reports more details about the device’s 802.11 wireless (see Figure 4-5) connection. To access it:

    • While on the Welcome screen, press the Pushbutton and hold for three beeps to get to the Settings menu.

    • Select Connection

    • Select WLAN Settings

    • Select WLAN Status

    To return to the Welcome screen:

    • Select Back

    • Select Exit

    To configure WLAN enabled devices via SoftAP mode (see Figure 4-6) complete the following steps:

    1. While on the Welcome screen, press the Pushbutton and hold for three beeps to get to the Settings menu.

    2. Press Connection

    3. Press WLAN Settings

    4. Press SoftAP Mode​

    To return to the Welcome screen:

    • Select Back

    • Select Exit

    This device incorporates a built-in Lithium-ion rechargeable battery, which requires little maintenance. It is not subject to “charge memory” and therefore does not require deep discharge cycles to restore its charge capacity like many other battery technologies.

    When properly powered through its USB port, the device powers on automatically, remains powered on provided the host does not put it in USB Suspend mode, and draws power both for operation and for recharging the battery (see How to Charge the Battery). While charging, the device consumes more power from the USB connection than when the battery is fully charged. The device stops charging the battery when it determines it is optimally full, to prevent overcharging.

    If the device is not connected to USB power, or if the USB connection does not provide enough power, the device powers itself using the rechargeable battery. When the battery discharges to a critically low level, the device powers down automatically. It is important to not allow the device’s main battery to remain completely discharged any longer than necessary. For information about how to prevent this from occurring during handling and storage, see section 2.3 Handling to Avoid Accidental Tamper. To prevent this from occurring during regular use:

    · Do not allow the device’s main battery to remain completely discharged for prolonged periods of time, and ideally do not allow it to ever reach 0%. Create a charging schedule that recharges the battery well before it is fully depleted.

    · When the device is not connected to USB power, preserve the battery’s charge when it is not in use by putting the device into Sleep mode or powering it off completely (see How to Power On / Wake Up from Standby Mode / Power Off).

    The device’s rechargeable battery is designed to last hundreds of charging cycles, but with time and / or with use, its charge capacity will naturally degrade. Following the recommendations in this section will maintain the battery’s charge capacity for as long as possible.

    When powered on, DynaFlex II starts in the idle / waiting state and shows a Welcome page on the touchscreen. See How to Power On / Wake Up from Standby Mode / Power Off. This page indicates battery level and charge status on the top right corner of the screen. See Figure 4-7 Welcome Screen.

    Figure 4-7 Welcome Screen

    The table of symbols below describes the various power level and charge status icons.

    DynaFlex II products have an onboard rechargeable battery to supply their own power when not powered through the USB-C port. The battery must be periodically recharged by connecting the device to the optional charging station, or to a USB port or stand-alone USB charger. Both the charging station and the device require a USB power supply that can provide at least 500mA @ 5V, optimally 1A @ 5V.

    To charge the device without an optional charging station, connect it to a USB charger or a USB host as described in How to . For best results, use the cable that is included with the device; it includes shielding at both ends to reduce interference. When charging, make sure the device is receiving enough power from the USB connection (the battery level should increase even when device is in use). A full recharge cycle for a completely drained battery depends on how it is being charged. From a host USB port at 500mA or dedicated wall charger, full charge takes approximately 7 hours. After connecting the device to a power source, make sure the LEDs indicate the device is charging (see section 4.3 About the Status LEDs).

    To charge the device in the optional charging station for power only (no USB communication):

    1. Make sure the charging station is properly installed and is receiving USB power. See .

    2. Place the device in the charging station with the charging contacts pointing into the charging station and the device’s face pointing toward the ceiling as shown in Figure 3-15 – Connecting DynaFlex II to the Optional Charging Station.

    3. Check the device’s LEDs to make sure it is charging.

    For important information about the device’s power systems, optimal charging methods during regular use, optimal handling and storage, and other information about keeping the device’s power systems in the best possible condition, see and About Power.

    To power on the device, press and hold the Pushbutton for one second, or connect the device to USB power. After powering on, devices with touchscreens show a page of information about the device, then transition to showing the Welcome page or custom graphics, if they are configured to do so. For more information about custom graphics, see

    To power off the device, disconnect the device from USB power. To reset the device, see section How to Force Reset.

    If all LEDs are off, the device is in Powered Off mode, USB Suspend mode, or Standby mode. For details about reading the status of the device with LEDs, see About Operating Modes and About the Status LEDs.

    To force the device to reset, power it off then power it on again (see How to Power On / Wake Up from Standby Mode / Power Off). Alternatively, you may use a small tool such as a paperclip to carefully press the Recessed Switch inside the small hole on the bottom of the device (see ). The host may also reset the device by sending the Reset Device command (see Developing Custom Software).

    The device also automatically powers off if the rechargeable battery reaches a level that is low enough to prevent the device from successfully completing a transaction.

    About USB Suspend

    When the device is connected to a host via USB (see ), the host and its operating system can use standard USB functions to put the device into USB Suspend mode to conserve power (see About Operating Modes). This occurs when there is no software running on the host that has an active USB connection with the device. When the device goes into USB Suspend mode, the device’s display and LEDs turn off. When the host wakes up the device from USB Suspend, the device returns to normal operation.

    It is possible to configure a Windows host to not suspend the device by editing the registry. Open HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Enum\USB\VID_0801&PID_2020, then open the folder with the device’s serial number inside that folder and open the Device Parameters folder inside that. Set the value of EnhancedPowerManagementEnabled equal to 0. After changing the setting, physically disconnect and re-connect the device to the host.

    For security purposes, the device is designed to perform an automatic maintenance reset periodically to clear all data from memory. When the device has been on continuously for 23 hours, it terminates all current operations, stops responding to new commands, and immediately performs a full reset. At the end of the automatic maintenance reset, the device powers back on and returns to normal operation.

    The operator uses the point of sale to start a transaction by following these steps and guidelines below:

    1. Ensure that the device is powered on, see How to Power On / Wake Up from Standby Mode / Power Off.

    2. Ensure that the device is connected to a wireless access point and has good signal strength (Refer to Connection Status Page.)

    3. Start the transaction using the point of sale’s interface. Depending on how the host software is designed, the host sends various messages requesting that the cardholder or operator enter additional information, and the device requests payment as described in Using the Reader.

    The steps for starting a transaction and reading a card or contactless payment device are different depending on the device’s configuration and on the design of the host software. Host software developers should see Developing Custom Software for implementation references. The solution developer should provide solution-specific instructions for operators to follow. A transaction follows this essential flow:

    1. An advanced operator has already made sure DynaFlex II or DynaFlex II PED is configured properly and is connected to the host (see ). When the device is connected to the host via USB and powered by the USB-C connector, the host software may always keep a connection open to the device.

    2. The operator makes sure DynaFlex II or DynaFlex II PED is receiving power either from its rechargeable battery or from the USB connection, and is awake and powered on (see How to Power On / Wake Up from Standby Mode / Power Off and About the Status LEDs).

    3. The operator uses the host software’s user interface (for example, a point of sale) to finalize a transaction amount, then initiates a transaction. In solutions that are designed to respond to cardholder input events that occur when the device is idle, such as unprompted swiping, inserting, or tapping a card or electronic payment device, or pressing the touchscreen, the host software may respond to those inputs by notifying the host, and the host software may trigger other operations without being initiated by an operator (for example, the host software may immediately start a transaction, or alert the cardholder or operator to take action).

    To swipe magnetic stripe cards, follow these steps:

    1. Wait for the device to display an action prompt, or, if the solution is designed to respond to cardholder actions that occur while the device is idle, such as swiping, inserting, or tapping a card or electronic payment device, or pressing the touchscreen, initiate the transaction by performing one of those actions instead of waiting. In these cases, the device may automatically and rapidly pass through several of the steps below without requiring cardholder interaction.

      1. Devices with a display show on-screen text and buttons (see Figure 4-8 below for examples).

      2. The device shows the transaction status using the LEDs. If the host has directed the device to enable the contactless interface, LED1 lights solid green and all other LEDs are off, per EMV standards, to indicate it is ready for a tap. If the host has directed the device to disable the contactless interface, the device continues to show idle statuses on LED1 and LED2.

    Immediately after the user swipes a magnetic stripe card, the device disables the option to use the contactless interface. If the cardholder needs to revert to a contactless card or device for payment while a transaction is in process, the operator should cancel the transaction and start again.

    Figure 4-8 – Example Card Swipe Screens

    Figure 4-9 – Swiping a Magnetic Stripe Card

    To insert contact chip cards, follow these steps:

    1. Wait for the device to display an action prompt, or, if the solution is designed to respond to cardholder actions that occur while the device is idle, such as swiping, inserting, or tapping a card or electronic payment device, or pressing the touchscreen, initiate the transaction by performing one of those actions instead of waiting. In these cases, the device may automatically and rapidly pass through several of the steps below without requiring cardholder interaction.

      1. Devices with a touchscreen display on-screen text and buttons (see Figure 4-10 below for examples).

      2. Devices with or without a touchscreen show the transaction status using the LEDs. If the host has directed the device to enable the contactless interface, LED1 lights solid green and all other LEDs are off, per EMV standards, to indicate it is ready for a tap, swipe, or insert. If the host has directed the device to disable the contactless interface, the device continues to show idle statuses on LED1 and LED2.

    Immediately after the user inserts a chip card, the device disables the option to use the contactless interface. If the cardholder needs to revert to a contactless card or device for payment while a transaction is in process, the operator should cancel the transaction and start again.

    Figure 4-10 – Example Card Insertion Screens

    Figure 4-11 – Inserting a Chip Card

    To tap a contactless card or smartphone, follow these steps:

    1. Wait for the device to display an action prompt, or, if the solution is designed to respond to cardholder actions that occur while the device is idle, such as swiping, inserting, or tapping a card or electronic payment device, or pressing the touchscreen, initiate the transaction by performing one of those actions instead of waiting. In these cases, the device may automatically and rapidly pass through several of the steps below without requiring cardholder interaction.

      1. Devices with a touchscreen show on-screen text and buttons (see Figure 4-12 below for examples).

      2. Devices with or without a touchscreen show the transaction status using the LEDs. LED1 lights solid green and all other LEDs are off, per EMV standards, to indicate it is ready for a tap (or swipe or insert, if the host has enabled those interfaces for this transaction).

    Figure 4-12 – Example Contactless Transaction Screens

    Figure 4-13 – Tapping a Contactless Card / Smartphone

    To tap a contactless NFC Tags / MIFARE Classic / MIFARE DESFire /MIFARE Plus cards, follow these steps:

    1. Wait for the device to display an action prompt. If the solution is designed to respond to cardholder actions that occur while the device is idle, such as swiping, inserting, or tapping a card or electronic payment device, or pressing the touchscreen, initiate the transaction by performing one of those actions instead of waiting. In these cases, the device may automatically and rapidly pass through several of the steps below without requiring cardholder interaction.

      1. Devices with a touchscreen display on-screen text and buttons (see Figure 4-12 for examples) via the host.

      2. Devices with or without a touchscreen show the transaction status using the LEDs. LED1 illuminates solid green, and all other LEDs are off, per EMV standards, to indicate it is ready for a tap (or swipe / insert, if the host has enabled those interfaces for this transaction).

    To scan a barcode, follow these steps:

    1. Make sure you are using a DynaFlex II model that includes a barcode reader, indicated by QR code markings on the face of the device surrounding the barcode reader lens (see ).

    2. If the barcode being scanned is not on a self-illuminated source such as a smartphone, make sure there is enough ambient light for the camera to read the barcode. In low light conditions, the barcode reader will only be able to read self-illuminated sources.

    3. In some solutions, the operator may have to perform an operation in the host software to enable the barcode reader, or to start a transaction with the barcode reader enabled.

    Figure 4-15 – Scanning a Barcode

    Devices with touchscreen displays provide support for starting a transaction that immediately prompts the operator or cardholder to enter card data manually. Manual card entry can be useful in the following situations:

    • As a last resort form of transaction fallback:

      • The cardholder swiped during a transaction that had one or more card interfaces enabled, but the device could not read card data.

      • The cardholder inserted a chip card during a transaction that had one or more card interfaces enabled, but the device could not read card data and could not fall back to swipe.

    • In card not present transactions, including merchant locations where cardholders do not have their card, in telephone call centers, and so on. In these cases, the operator uses the device to keep sensitive data out of the merchant’s domain, for compliance and security reasons.

    To enter card information manually, follow these steps. For every prompt below, press the Enter button after entering data to move to the next step, or press the Backsp button to delete data that has already been entered but stay on the same step, or press the Cancel button to completely end the transaction:

    1. The operator starts a transaction, specifying manual card entry, optionally specifying a transaction amount and cash back amount. If the solution is designed to respond to cardholder actions that occur while the device is idle, such as pressing the touchscreen, the operator may initiate the transaction by performing one of those actions instead of initiating the transaction from the host.

    2. The device shows a numeric keypad and a prompt to enter Card Number (see Figure 4-16). Enter the card number and press the Enter button. If the device double-beeps when pressing the Enter button and does not proceed to the next step, the PAN is not valid. The device may be configured to enable MOD10 validation, which makes sure the card number passes a validity check to prevent errors during entry. It is also possible you have entered too many or too few PAN digits. Double-check the card number and use the Backsp button to correct any errors, then press Enter.

    3. The device displays a numeric keypad and a prompt to enter Exp Date (MMYY) (see Figure 4-17). Enter the expiration date on the card and press the Enter button.

    Figure 4-16 – Enter Card Number

    Figure 4-17 – Enter Expiration Date

    Figure 4-18 – Enter CVV/CVC/Card ID

    When the device is processing a transaction using the EMV Transaction Flow (as opposed to the Quick Chip Transaction Flow), devices with a touchscreen display the amount of the transaction when they prompt the cardholder to swipe, dip, or tap a card or payment device, as shown in Figure 4-19. The cardholder implicitly confirms / accepts the transaction amount by presenting payment.

    Figure 4-19 - Example Transaction Amount Screens

    Devices with a touchscreen display provide support for requesting a PIN from the cardholder. The device prompts the cardholder to Enter PIN (see Figure 4-20) as required by the financial institution. The device expects the PIN to be between 4 and 12 digits long. After entering the PIN, the cardholder must press the Enter button.

    Figure 4-20 – Enter PIN

    If the double PIN entry option is enabled, the device prompts the cardholder to enter the PIN a second time (see Figure 4-21). The process for re-entry is identical to the process for the first entry.

    Figure 4-21 – Enter PIN Again

    Devices with a touchscreen display provide support for requesting a Tip Entry from the cardholder. The device prompts the cardholder to Enter Tip (see Figure 4-22 – Enter Tip).

    Figure 4-22 – Enter Tip

    If the cardholder selects a Custom button, the device prompts a keypad for the cardholder to ENter Tip Amount (see Figure 4-23 – Enter Tip Amount). After entering the Tip Amount, the cardholder must press the Enter button.

    Figure 4-23 – Enter Tip Amount

    After finalizing the Tip, and pressing the Subnmit button, the device prompts the cardholder to present a payment (see Figure 4-24). The on-screen prompt is different depending on which payment method(s) the host directed the device to enable for the transaction. If the Quick Chip flow is in effect, the prompt does not include the transaction amount. If the Full EMV flow is in effect, the prompt includes the transaction amount.

    Figure 4-24 – Example Present Payment Screen

    Devices with a touchscreen display and active connection to a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Host provide support for entering a Sale Amount from the cardholder. The device prompts the cardholder with the Start Sale button (see Figure 4-25).

    Figure 4-25 - Start Sale Screen

    When the cardholder presses the Start Sale button, the device prompts the cardholder to Enter Sale Amount (see Figure 4-26).

    Figure 4-26 - Enter Sale Amount

    After the cardholder enters the Sale Amount and presses Enter, the device prompts the cardholder to enter Tip (see How to Enter Tip).

    When a device with a touchscreen display prompts cardholders with a Please Sign page, (Figure 4-27 - Signature Capture Requested) cardholders should use the tip of their finger to press and glide against the screen to sign, then press the OK button. To clear the current signature on the display and start over, press the Clear button.

    Figure 4-27 - Signature Capture Requested

    Devices that do not have a touchscreen display cannot prompt for or collect a signature. When these devices are aware that a signature is required to complete a transaction, they send a notification message to the host that includes the status Signature Capture Requested. In this case, the solution design collects the cardholder’s signature via a different method.

    Card Read Result

    Active Mode: Armed for a Tap Transaction

    Armed for Tap

    Tap Read Progress

    Tap Read Progress

    Card Read Result

    Device-Wide Failure

    During major failures (such as tamper), LED1-LED4 report the nature of the failure based on the steps required to resolve it.

    Other Colors

    Reserved

    Blinking to show device is connecting to a wireless access point

    WebSocket is active or connected

    WebSocket is inactive or disconnected

    Device’s Active Connection is set to 802.11 wireless, and the device is connected to a wireless access point. The number of bars indicates the strength of the signal the device is receiving from the wireless access point (commonly known as RSSI).

    and

    TLS security on the 802.11 wireless connection is Disabled (red open padlock) TLS security on the 802.11 wireless connection is Enabled (black closed padlock)

    Battery is fully charged.

    Battery is OK, between 20% and 95% charged.

    Battery is low, between 10% and 20% charged.

    Battery is critically low, between 3% and 10% charged.

    Battery is empty, below 3% charged.

    Battery is charging.

    OFFLINE/Security activated: indicates the device is ready to have keys injected. If this occurs, remove the device from service and contact the manufacturer or your reseller for support.

  • OFFLINE/HW missing: indicates the device cannot detect one or more of its installed modules. This may indicate a mechanical or electrical failure. If this occurs, remove the device from service and contact the manufacturer or your reseller for support.

  • OFFLINE/Keys missing: indicates the device is missing one of the encryption keys that are critical to its data security systems. The device needs to have keys properly injected. If this occurs, remove the device from service and contact the manufacturer or your reseller for support.

  • OFFLINE: without any clarifying text indicates the device is not ready for normal operation.

  • Battery is critically low, between 3% and 10% charged.

    Battery is empty, below 3% charged.

    Battery is charging.

    Should the device run out of battery or the device is disconnected from the network during a transaction, the operator should cancel the transaction on the point of sale, and proceed to repeat these steps to initiate the transaction again.
  • The host communicates with the device, and reports to the operator when the device is ready.

  • The operator guides and assists the cardholder in presenting payment.

  • The cardholder interacts with the device to present payment. The following sections provide additional details about presenting each of the available payment methods.

  • Devices with a touchscreen, display messages prompting the cardholder to perform certain actions. The host should also monitor the progress of the transaction, and when necessary, should report issues to the operator, who may need to relay the messages to the cardholder.

  • The device reports the success or failure of the transaction to the cardholder and to the host.

  • All devices report detailed transaction status to the host, and host software may report that information to operators so they can guide cardholders through the transaction (for example, “swipe, insert, or tap your card now please”).

  • Locate the magnetic stripe reader swipe path on the face of the device.

  • Orient the card with the magnetic stripe facing away from the cardholder and the touchscreen or contactless landing zone, toward the LEDs and the chip card insertion slot as shown in Figure 4-9.

  • Swipe the card through the magnetic stripe reader in either direction.

  • Look for a prompt that the device has successfully read the card:

    1. The device turns LED4 green for a short time.

    2. The device beeps once.

    3. If the device has a display:

      1. The device displays PROCESSING .

      2. The device may display AUTHORIZING PLEASE WAIT .

      3. If the transaction requires a signature, the device prompts for a signature (see How to Use Signature Capture).

      4. The device shows THANK YOU .

    4. The device ends the transaction and reports the transaction status to the host.

  • If the device cannot read the card’s magnetic stripe data:

    1. The device turns LED4 red for a brief time.

    2. The device beeps twice.

    3. The device ends the transaction.

    4. Devices with a display show FAILED , then THANK YOU , then return to the idle page (see Welcome Page / Active Idle Page).

    5. The device notifies the host that the transaction failed. If this occurs, the host software may choose to retry the transaction or revert to prompting the operator to enter card data manually (see How to Enter Card Information Manually).

  • All devices report detailed transaction status to the host, and host software may report that information to operators so they can guide cardholders through the transaction (for example, “swipe, insert, or tap your card now please”).

  • Locate the chip card insertion slot on the face of the device, as shown in Figure 4-11.

  • Orient the chip card so the chip faces the cardholder, toward the touchscreen or contactless landing zone and the LEDs.

  • Insert the chip card into the slot, then push gently on the card until it stops. There should not be any substantial resistance until the chip card is fully inserted.

  • Wait for a prompt that the device has successfully read the card, then remove the card.

    1. The device turns LED4 green for a brief time.

    2. The device beeps once.

    3. If the device has a display:

      1. The device shows Processing

      2. The device shows Please Wait and/or AUTHORIZING PLEASE WAIT .

      3. If the transaction requires a signature, the device prompts for a signature (see How to Use Signature Capture).

      4. The device shows REMOVE CARD .

      5. The device shows THANK YOU .

    4. The device ends the transaction and reports the transaction status to the host.

    5. As a reminder to the cardholder to remove the card, the device beeps continuously until the card is removed.

  • If the device cannot communicate with the chip card:

    1. The device illuminates LED4 red for a short time.

    2. The device beeps twice.

    3. Devices with a touchscreen display FAILED, then Remove if the card is still in the slot, then THANK YOU, when the card is removed. The device then returns to the idle page (see Welcome Page / Active Idle Page).

    4. The device ends the transaction and notifies the host that the transaction failed. If this occurs, the host software may choose to retry the transaction (for example, with different payment types enabled) or revert to prompting the operator to enter card data manually (see How to Enter Card Information Manually).

    5. As a reminder to the cardholder to remove the card, the device double-beeps continuously until the card is removed.

  • All devices report detailed transaction status to the host, and host software may report that information to operators so they can guide cardholders through the transaction (for example, “please tap your card now”).

  • If the cardholder is using an electronic payment device, such as a smartphone, make sure the payment device has NFC turned ON and has a payment app configured to process transactions. For details, see the documentation provided by the smartphone manufacturer and payment app publisher.

  • Briefly hold the card, smartphone, or other contactless payment device over the contactless landing zone, indicated by the EMVCo Contactless Indicator symbol on the device’s face (see Figure 4-12). Because each smartphone model may have its NFC antenna placed differently, the ideal tap position may vary by make and model. For example, Samsung users may need to center the phone on the contactless landing zone, while Apple users may need to tap the top of the phone on the contactless landing zone.

  • Wait for a prompt that the device has successfully read the card, smartphone, or other contactless payment device, then remove it from the contactless landing zone.

    1. The device quickly lights the second LED green to show it is processing, then lights the third LED green to show it has successfully read the tap, then lights the fourth LED green to show the read is complete (see Figure 4-14).

    2. The device beeps once.

    3. If the device has a touchscreen:

      1. The device may display PROCESSING .

      2. The device displays REMOVE CARD .

      3. If the transaction requires a signature, the device prompts for a signature (see How to Use Signature Capture).

      4. The device displays THANK YOU .

    4. The device ends the transaction and reports the transaction status to the host.

  • If the device cannot communicate with the card, smartphone, or other contactless payment device:

    1. The device ends the transaction.

    2. The device illuminates LED4 red, for a brief time.

    3. The device beeps twice.

    4. Devices with a touchscreen display INSERT, SWIPE, OR TRY ANOTHER CARD , then THANK YOU. The device then returns to the idle page (see Welcome Page / Active Idle Page).

    5. The device notifies the host that the transaction failed. If this occurs, the host software may choose to retry the transaction (for example, with different payment types enabled) or revert to prompting the operator to enter card data manually (see How to Enter Card Information Manually).

  • All devices report detailed transaction status to the host, and host software may report that information to operators so they can guide cardholders through the transaction (for example, “please tap your card now”).

  • Place the card over the device's designated contactless landing zone, marked by the EMVCo Contactless Indicator symbol on the front face of the device.

  • Wait for LED status:

    1. Initially, LED 2 illuminates, signaling the device is processing. The device subsequently illuminates LED 3 and LED 4, indicating card detection. Notifications are then sent to identify the card type and UID.

    2. The Host application can further interact with the NFC Tag using pass-through commands. For details, see DynaFlex Products Programmer’s Manual.

    3. If the pass-through command is the last successful command, the device will end the transaction, emitting a single beep signaling a successful transaction. The user then needs to remove the card.

    4. If an error is detected, the device will end the transaction and emit two beeps to signal the error. The user then needs to remove the card.

  • The device notifies the host that the transaction has ended with the NFC Tag removed.

  • Wait for the device, the host, or the operator to prompt for a barcode read:
    1. Devices with a touchscreen display the prompt SCAN BARCODE .

    2. When the cardholder (or operator on devices without a touchscreen) presses SCAN BARCODE , the device illuminates the barcode reader indicator LED next to the barcode reader lens.

  • Hold the barcode in front of the barcode reader camera:

    1. If possible, use the barcode reader's indicator LED light to align the barcode within its field of view. The barcode reader lens’ field of view spans 16 degrees above and below the lens, and 21 degrees to the left and right of a line perpendicular to the lens.

    2. Hold the barcode as close as one inch from the barcode reader lens. For smaller barcodes, the device will read immediately. If it does not, gradually pull back up to 14 inches from the lens until the device reports a successful read. Larger barcodes must be far enough away from the device that the whole barcode is within the camera’s field of view; if a large barcode is too close, the barcode reader can only see a zoomed in portion of the barcode.

    3. Do not tilt the barcode more than 60 degrees from parallel to the device’s face.

  • Wait for the device or the host to report the barcode has been read successfully:

    1. Devices with a touchscreen will no longer display the prompt SCAN BARCODE.

    2. The device beeps once.

    3. The device turns off the barcode reader indicator LED.

  • The device shows a numeric keypad and a prompt to enter CVV/CVC/Card ID . Enter the card verification code / value, then press the Enter button. This code is a 3- or 4- digit number printed on the front or back of the card, and is also referred to as a security code, security validation value, CAV2, CVC2, CVV2, or CID, depending on which payment brand issued the card.

  • The device shows a summary of all the data that was entered during the transaction. If the operator specified a transaction amount when starting the transaction, the summary includes the total transaction amount (purchase amount plus cash back, if any).

  • Verify all the information is correct:

    1. If it is correct, press the Enter button to proceed with the transaction.

    2. If it is correct but the cardholder or operator wishes to stop the transaction, press the Cancel button to completely end the transaction.

    3. If it is not correct, press Cancel button to completely end the transaction, and start the transaction again from the first step.

  • In This Context

    LED1

    LED2

    LED3

    LED4

    Active Mode: Not Armed for a Tap Transaction

    Power

    Connection

    Color

    Means

    Red

    Stop or stopped

    Example: LED1 is red. Stop using device: Battery is about to run out of charge.

    Yellow

    Wait or waiting

    LED2 will show status for Access Point connection: Green connected, yellow waiting for connection.

    Green

    Color

    Means

    Solid

    Solid LEDs require an operator or cardholder to take action to change the state the LED is reporting.

    Example: Host is connected. Cardholder or host would have to disconnect. Example: Host is disconnected. Host would have to initiate connection.

    Blinking

    Blinking LEDs indicate the device is in the process of doing / attempting something. Blink duty cycle and blink period are selected to show urgency or ongoing progress through a series of steps.

    Example: Device is attempting to connect to the WLAN access point.

    Short time

    Status Icon

    Meaning

    Device’s Active Connection is set to USB, and the device has successfully established a USB communication connection with the host.

    WLAN is not configured

    Battery Power Level and Charge Status Icons

    Battery is fully charged.

    Battery is OK, between 20% and 95% charged.

    Operation Overview

    About the Status LEDs

    DynaFlex II LED Allocation

    DynaFlex II LED Colors

    DynaFlex II LED Patterns

    About the Touchscreen Display

    Welcome Page / Active Idle Page

    Status Icon Meaning

    Device Information Page

    SoftAP Page

    Power Management

    How to Check Battery Level

    Battery Power Level and Charge Status Icons

    Notice: Per UL requirements, the device is designed to not recharge its internal battery when the external temperature is below 0°C or above 40°C.

    How to Charge the Battery

    How to Power On / Wake Up from Standby Mode / Power Off

    How to Force Reset

    About Maintenance Reset

    How to Start a Handheld Transaction Using Wireless LAN

    Using the Reader

    How to Swipe Magnetic Stripe Cards

    How to Insert Contact Chip Cards

    How to Tap Contactless Cards / Devices

    How to Tap Contactless NFC Tags / MIFARE Classic / MIFARE DESFire /MIFARE Plus Cards and Send Pass-through Commands

    How to Scan Barcodes

    How to Enter Card Information Manually

    How to Verify the Transaction Amount

    How to Enter PINs

    How to Enter Tip

    How to Enter Sale Amount

    How to Use Signature Capture

    Caution: Do not use a stylus or other hard object on the touchscreen. The touchscreen is designed for fingers only and can be scratched or damaged if misused.

    www.pcisecuritystandards.org,
    Connect DynaFlex II Products to a Host or Charger via USB
    How to Mount the Charging Station
    Handling to Avoid Accidental Tamper
    DynaFamily Programmer’s Manual.
    About DynaFlex II Components
    How to Connect DynaFlex II Products to a Host or Charger via USB
    Connecting to a Host
    About DynaFlex II Components

    Reserved

    Go, going, or went.

    LED3 will show status for WebSocket connection: Green connected, yellow Waiting for connection.

    LEDs sometimes illuminate for a short time to indicate a process has ended (success or failure) and the device is going to transition to another state soon.

    Example: Successful card read.

    Battery is low, between 10% and 20% charged.

    Operation

    About Operating Modes

    During operation, DynaProx devices transition between distinct operating modes, which are important for operators to understand so they can properly control the device:

    • Powered Off Mode is the shipping and storage mode of the device. No external power is applied to the device through the USB cable or RS-232 cable. In this mode, the device consumes practically no power. To set the device from Powered Off mode to Active mode, connect the device to USB power or RS-232 power.

    • Active Mode is the device’s normal “awake” state when it is in use. In this mode, LEDs are powered on, and the device is ready to receive commands from the host. To set the device from Active mode to Powered Off mode remove power.

    Operation Overview

    During normal operation, the operator initiates a transaction from the host, and the cardholder interacts with the device. Transaction types may include new accounts, teller window applications, checking, savings, mortgages, retail transactions, or any other type of transaction where there is interaction between the cardholder and the operator.

    For each transaction type, the host software directs the cardholder, and the transaction flow on the device may differ depending on what the host software specifies and what the cardholder does.

    For full host control, the device should not be allowed to run for > = 23 hours without a reset. To accomplish this, have the host application send a reset command twice a day separated by at least one hour.

    Example: Host software resets the device at 1 AM and 3AM. This keeps the device from initiating its own reset.

    Card Reading provides examples of the cardholder experience for each type of payment. If the device cannot read payment data, the host software may prompt the cardholder to repeat the action or reject the transaction.

    As mentioned in , DynaProx models equipped with a barcode reader (BCR) have a similar physical appearance as models without a BCR, as shown in Figure 6-1. BCR models are equipped with a camera and a QR code located on the front side of the device.

    • DynaProx devices have a user interface composed of two elements: a visual indicator consisting of four mono LEDs and a beeper that produces audible alerts.

    • DynaProx BCR devices have a user interface composed of three elements: a visual indicator consisting of four mono LEDs, a barcode reader, and a beeper that produces audible alerts.

    • DynaProx devices do not feature any input components such as buttons or touch screens.

    Figure 6-1 – DynaProx and DynaProx BCR

    The arrangement of the four mono LEDs on DynaProx and DynaProx BCR devices is illustrated in Figure 6-1. The LEDs are labeled LEDs 1 to 4 and are ordered from left to right on the device.

    When DynaProx is powered on, its LEDs will illuminate green, when it is powered off, the LEDs will remain unlit. Figure 6-3 illustrates the on/off status of the LEDs.

    Figure 6-3 - LED ON/OFF

    DynaProx devices equipped with a bar code reader have a status light that indicates whether the barcode feature is powered on or off.

    Figure 6-4 - BCR Light

    All DynaProx devices are equipped with a beeper that produces a short beep lasting for half a second and a long beep that lasts for one second.

    This section contains information regarding the operational modes of DynaProx's LEDs, beeper, and BCR light. It is important to note that DynaProx devices are not equipped with batteries. If there is no power supply to the device through the USB cable or RS-232 serial port, all LEDs, along with the BCR light, will not illuminate. In such instances, the user interface will resemble the device as it appears in Figure 6-1.

    When the device USB cable is connected to the host USB port, a brief beep will sound and all four LEDs will turn on for half a second, as shown in Figure 6-5. Following this, LED 1 and LED 2 will remain illuminated, while LED 3 and LED 4 will remain unlit. After a duration of 10 seconds, all LEDs will turn off, and the device will enter an idle state. This occurs because the host sets the USB port into suspension mode, prompting the device to enter an idle state.

    Figure 6-5 – LED Power on Sequence – USB Power On

    When DynaProx is in an idle state, it can be detected by a host through the USB HID port see Figure 6-6. After the host has connected to DynaProx, LED 1 and LED 2 will stay on. The device is in Ready State.

    Figure 6-6 - LEDs Status (Idle State) Before Host Detection and LED Status (Ready State) After Connecting to Host

    When the device is in ready state, two LEDs will be illuminated see Figure 6-7. When a card is detected only LED 1 will be on. If the device has a BCR and it is enabled, the BCR light will also be turned on see Figure 6-8.

    Figure 6-7 - Ready State

    Figure 6-8 – Card detected.

    When a card is read, all four LEDs will turn on in sequence (1, 2, 3, and 4) followed by a long beep, indicating a successful transaction, see Figure 6-9. After a successful transaction, the device will return to the ready state when the transaction is complete, see Figure 6-10.

    Figure 6-9 – LED Sequence – Payment Transaction Successful

    Figure 6-10 – Return to Ready State After Successful Transaction

    When the device is in ready state, two LEDs will be illuminated see Figure 6-11. When a card is detected, only LED 1 will be turned on. If the device has a BCR and it is enabled, the BCR light will also be turned on see Figure 6-12.

    Figure 6-11 - Ready State

    Figure 6-12 – Card Detected

    In the event of a failed or canceled transaction, LED 1 will stay illuminated, and the device will emit two short beeps. If the device is equipped with a BCR, its light will also be on, as shown in Figure 6-13. The device will then return to the ready state, as demonstrated in Figure 6-14.

    Figure 6-13 - Payment Transaction Failed

    Figure 6-14 - Ready State

    Upon being connected to USB power (after a delay of three seconds), the device will emit a short beep, and all four LEDs will turn on for half a second, as shown in Figure 6-15. The device will then return to the Ready State.

    Figure 6-15 - Device Connected to USB Power

    Upon being connected to RS-232 power (after a delay of three seconds), the device will emit a short beep, and all four LEDs will turn on for half a second, see Figure 6-16. The device will then return to ready state.

    Figure 6-16 - Successful Connection to RS-232 Power Supply

    Figure 6-17 - Device in Idle State Before RS-232 Power Supply Connection

    When the device is in a ready state, as explained in section 6.3.2.1 Power On , connecting an RS-232 power supply to it will not change its state and it will remain in the ready state see Figure 6-18.

    Figure 6-18 - Ready State

    When the device is configured in Event Notification Mode, the user interface will have the same appearance as depicted in .

    At present, no user interface elements such as LEDs or beeper sounds have been established for DynaProx.

    DynaProx provides four Mono LEDs (see ), numbered LED1 through LED4, which report the device’s current operating status.

    • The meaning of each LED depends on the device’s operating mode. See and Error! Reference source not found. Most of the time, operators will check the device’s status using the LEDs when it is in Active Mode while the device is not performing a transaction.

    • LED blinking patterns have specific meanings as well, as described in DynaProx LED Allocation. A blinking LED generally means the device is actively doing something to change the state that the LED is indicating, and solid indicates a persistent state that would require an operator or cardholder to take action to change. One major exception is a device-wide functional failure state, such as a tamper state, where all LEDs flash urgently to call the attention of an advanced operator to intervene.

    In this manual, specific blinking patterns are described in more detail in the sections where they are relevant. For example, information about how the LEDs show the device’s connection status is in section .

    DynaProx LED Allocation

    DynaProx LED Patterns

    DynaProx products have a beeper that provides feedback to operators and cardholders about the internal state of the device:

    • The device sounds one short beep after it has successfully read a contactless tap, and the cardholder can safely remove the card or device from the contactless landing zone.

    • The device emits two beeps when reading a card or contactless payment device to indicate a card read error occurred.

    • The device sounds two beeps when an operator cancels a pending EMV transaction.

    The device provides an internal setting the host can use to adjust the global system volume. The device does not provide an interface to change the volume setting directly via buttons. If the device is too quiet or too loud:

    • Make sure the device is being ordered from the manufacturer with the desired volume setting.

    • Check to see whether the host software you are using provides a feature to check and/or adjust the volume setting.

    • If the host software does not provide that feature, request help from the development team that built the host software to check / change the volume setting. For details, see .

    To play a sequence of tones, follow these steps:

    • Make sure the device is in idle state.

    • Send an audio command to the device for playing a sequence of tones. For details, see .

    When properly powered through its USB port or RS-232 port, the device powers on automatically. For USB mode it will remain full powered mode to provide power to device. This device does not support USB suspend mode.

    The minimum required current and voltage are very important to the proper operation of the DynaProx reader. During contactless card reading, the NFC field is activated and the required current will rise from less than 100 mA to less than 800 mA for typically around 1 second. If the momentary current draw causes the supplied voltage to drop below 4 VDC, the DynaProx reader may reset and fail to complete the card read.

    Embedded systems and Single Board Computers (SBC) may find use in a wide range of card tending terminals. If the DynaProx will be supplied power through a USB port from one of these SBCs, it is important to be aware of the USB port current limitations, such as all USB ports may share a given amount of current, or the upstream current limitation of the system power supply.

    An optional power/ground connection is available on the DynaProx RS-232 connector, even if the actual RS-232 signals are not in use.

    To power on the device connect the device to USB power or RS-232 Power. Recommended 800 mA available current during transactions.

    To power off the device, disconnect the device from USB power or RS-232 Power. If all LEDs are off, the device is in Powered Off mode.

    For full host control, the device should not be allowed to run for > = 23 hours without a reset. To accomplish this, have the host application send a reset command twice a day separated by at least one hour.

    Example: Host software resets the device at 1 AM and 3AM. This keeps the device from initiating its own reset.

    The steps for starting a transaction and reading a contactless payment device are different depending on the device’s configuration and on the design of the host software. Host software developers should see for implementation references. The solution developer should provide solution-specific instructions for operators to follow. A transaction generally follows this essential flow:

    • An advanced operator has already made sure DynaProx is configured properly and is connected to the host (see ). When the device is connected to the host via USB and powered by the USB-C connector or RS-232, the host software may always keep a connection open to the device.

    • The operator makes sure DynaProx is receiving power either from the USB connection or from the RS-232 connection, and is awake and powered on (see and ).

    • The operator uses the host software’s user interface (for example, a point of sale) to finalize a transaction amount, then initiates a transaction. In solutions that are designed to respond to cardholder input events that occur when the device is idle, such as unprompted tapping of a card or electronic payment device, the host software may respond to those inputs by notifying the host, and the host software may trigger other operations without being initiated by an operator (for example, the host software may immediately start a transaction, or alert the cardholder or operator to take action).

    To tap a contactless card or smartphone, follow these steps:

    • Check LED status:

      • The device shows the transaction status using the LEDs. LED1 lights solid and all other LEDs are off, per EMV standards, to indicate it is ready for a tap.

      • All devices report detailed transaction status to the host, and host software may report that information to operators so they can guide cardholders through the transaction (for example, “please tap your card now”).

    • If the cardholder is using an electronic payment device, such as a smartphone, make sure the payment device has NFC turned On and has a payment app configured to process transactions. For details, see the documentation provided by the smartphone manufacturer and payment app publisher.

    Figure 6-19 - Tapping a Contactless Card / Smartphone

    Figure 6-20 – Contactless Read LED Sequence

    To scan a barcode, follow these steps:

    1. Make sure you are using a DynaProx model that includes a barcode reader, indicated by QR code markings on the face of the device surrounding the barcode reader lens (see ).

    2. If the barcode being scanned is not on a self-illuminated source such as a smartphone, make sure there is enough ambient light for the camera to read the barcode. In low light conditions, the barcode reader will only be able to read self-illuminated sources.

    3. In some solutions, the operator may have to perform an operation in the host software to enable the barcode reader, or to start a transaction with the barcode reader enabled.

    Figure 6-21 - Scanning a Barcode

    DynaProx products support Apple Value Added Services (Apple VAS) protocol.

    Contactless transactions using the Apple VAS protocol permits the device reader to perform the following supported operations:

    The device reads both Apple VAS data and EMV payment data from a tapped smartphone or reads EMV payment data from a tapped card. When device sends ARQC to the host to conclude the transaction, it includes EMV payment data in container FC and includes VAS data, if available, in container FE

    The device reads only Apple VAS data from a tapped smartphone and does not read data from a tapped card. If the tapped smartphone does not support VAS, the device does not detect or read from the smartphone. When the device send ARQC to conclude the transaction, it includes VAS data in container FE and does not include EMV payment data in container FC.

    The device reads only Apple VAS data from a tapped smartphone or reads EMV payment data from a tapped card. When the device sends ARQC to conclude the transaction, it only includes either EMV payment data in container FC for cards, or includes VAS data in container for smartphones.

    The device operates the same as EMV mode (01). It reads only EMV payment data from a tapped smartphone or a tapped card. When the device sends ARQC to conclude the transaction, it includes EMV payment data in container FC and does not include VAS data in container FE.

    For details, see .

    DynaProx is compatible with near field communication (NFC) technology such as MIFARE Classic / MIFARE DESFire /MIFARE Plus contactless IC products (smart cards).

    To tap an NFC Contactless IC Product and Send Pass-through commands, follow these steps:

    1. Check LED status:

      1. Per EMV standards, the device indicates transaction status through its LED indicators, located on the front face of the device. When ready for a tap, LED 1 shines steadily while all other LEDs remain unlit.

      2. All devices communicate transaction details to the host. The host software will relay this information to operators, allowing them to direct cardholders during the transaction, such as prompting "please tap your card now".

    Card Read Result

    Active Mode, armed for a tap transaction

    Armed for Tap

    Tap Read Progress

    Tap Read Progress

    Card Read Result

    The host communicates with the device, and reports to the operator when the device is ready.

  • The operator guides and assists the cardholder in presenting payment.

  • The cardholder interacts with the device to present payment. The following sections provide additional details about presenting each of the available payment methods.

  • The host monitors the progress of the transaction, and when necessary, should report issues to the operator, who may need to relay the messages to the cardholder.

  • The device reports the success or failure of the transaction to the cardholder and to the host.

  • Briefly hold the card, smartphone, or other contactless payment device over the contactless landing zone, indicated by the EMVCo Contactless Indicator symbol on the device’s face (see Figure 6-19). Because each smartphone model may have its NFC antenna placed differently, the ideal tap position may vary by make and model. For example, Samsung users may need to center the phone on the contactless landing zone, while Apple users may need to tap the top of the phone on the contactless landing zone.

  • Wait for LED status:

    • The device quickly lights the second LED to show it is processing, then lights the third LED to show it has successfully read the tap, then lights the fourth LED to show the read is complete (see Figure 6-20).

    • The device beeps once.

    • If the transaction requires a signature, the device sends a notification message to the host that includes the status Signature Capture Requested. In this case, the solution design collects the cardholder’s signature via a different method.

    • The device ends the transaction and reports the transaction status to the host.

  • If the device cannot communicate with the card, smartphone, or other contactless payment device:

    • The device ends the transaction.

    • The device lights LED4 for a short time.

    • The device beeps twice.

    • The device notifies the host that the transaction failed. If this occurs, the host software may choose to retry the transaction or revert to prompting the operator to perform another operation that is specific to the solution design.

  • Wait for the device, the host, or the operator to prompt for a barcode read:
    1. The device lights the barcode reader indicator LED next to the barcode reader lens.

  • Hold the barcode in front of the barcode reader camera:

    1. If possible, use the light from the barcode reader indicator LED to align the barcode within the barcode reader’s field of view, which extends 16 degrees above / below and 21 degrees to the left/right of a line perpendicular to the barcode reader lens.

    2. Hold the barcode as close as 1 inch from the lens. For smaller barcodes, the device will read immediately. If it does not, gradually move away up to 14 inches from the lens until the device reports a successful read. Larger barcodes must be far enough away from the device that the whole barcode is within the camera’s field of view; if a large barcode is too close, the barcode reader can only see a zoomed in portion of the barcode.

    3. Do not tilt the barcode more than 60 degrees from parallel to the device’s face.

  • Wait for the device or the host to report the barcode has been read successfully:

    1. The device beeps once.

    2. The device turns off the barcode reader indicator LED.

  • Place the card over the device's designated contactless landing zone, marked by the EMVCo Contactless Indicator symbol on the front face of the device.
  • Wait for LED status:

    1. Initially, LED 2 illuminates, signaling the device is processing. The device subsequently illuminates LED 3 and LED 4, indicating card detection. Notifications are then sent to identify the card type and UID.

    2. The Host application can further interact with the NFC Tag using pass-through commands. For details, see DynaProx Programmer’s Manual.

    3. If the pass-through command is the last successful command, the device will end the transaction, emitting a single beep signaling a successful transaction. The user then needs to remove the card.

    4. If an error is detected, the device will end the transaction and emit two beeps to signal the error. The user then needs to remove the card.

  • The device notifies the host that the transaction has ended with the NFC Tag removed.

  • In This Context

    LED1

    LED2

    LED3

    LED4

    Active Mode, not armed for a tap transaction

    Power

    Connection

    In This Context

    LED1

    LED2

    LED3

    LED4

    Device-wide failure

    During major failures (such as tamper), LED1-LED4 report the nature of the failure based on the most likely steps required to resolve it.

    Color

    Means

    Solid

    Solid LEDs generally require an operator or cardholder to take action to change the state the LED is reporting.

    Example: Host is connected. Cardholder or host would have to disconnect. Example: Host is disconnected. Host would have to initiate connection.

    Blinking

    Blinking LEDs generally indicate the device is in the process of doing / attempting something. Blink duty cycle and blink period are generally selected to show urgency or ongoing progress through a series of steps.

    Example: Device is attempting to connect to the 802.11 access point.

    Short time

    Introduction to User Interface

    Component Details

    LED Ordering

    LED Status

    BCR Status

    Beeper Alert

    Modes of Operation

    Power On via USB Cable

    USB Enumeration

    Payment Transaction

    Payment Transaction Successful

    Payment Transaction Unsuccessful

    USB Power Supply

    RS-232 Power Supply

    Event Notification Mode

    Bar Code Read Only

    About the Status LEDs

    About Sounds

    How to Play a Sequence of Tones

    Power Management

    About Power

    How to Power On / Wake Up from Standby Mode / Power Off

    About Maintenance Reset

    Card Reading

    About Reading Cards

    How to Tap Contactless Cards / Devices

    How to Scan Barcodes

    Apple VAS for DynaProx

    VAS App and Payment Mode (Dual Mode)

    AS App Only Mode (VAS Mode)

    VAS App or Payment Mode (Single Mode)

    Payment Only Mode (Payment Mode)

    How to Tap Contactless NFC Tags / MIFARE Classic / MIFARE DESFire /MIFARE Plus Cards and Send Pass-through Commands

    About Maintenance Reset
    About DynaProx Components
    Payment Transaction
    About DynaProx Components
    About Operating Modes
    Connecting to a Host
    DynaProx Programmer’s Manual
    DynaProx Programmer’s Manual
    Developing Custom Software
    Connecting to a Host
    How to Power On / Wake Up from Standby Mode / Power Off
    About the Status LEDs
    About DynaProx Components
    DynaProx Programmer’s Manual

    Reserved

    LEDs sometimes light for a short time to indicate some process has ended (success or failure) and the device is going to transition to another state soon.

    Example: Successful card read.

    General Description

    Product Name and Appearance

    The front view of all DynaFlex II Go models (with and without BCR), are shown in Figure 2‑1 below. The back view of all DynaFlex II Go devices are identical, as seen in Figure 2‑2.

    Figure 2 1 - DynaFlex II Go and DynaFlex II Go with BCR Front View

    Figure 2 2 – Back View of all DynaFlex II Go Models

    Product Type

    All DynaFlex II Go products include USB communications, a magnetic stripe reader (MSR), a contact chip card reader (ICCR), a contactless card reader (CTLS), and may also be purchased with an embedded barcode reader (BCR) and Bluetooth LE connectivity.

    DynaFlex II Go models can be used as desktop or handheld devices. They are approved as a secure card reader (SCR) under PCI PTS POI v6.2 requirements.

    Usage in any other environment will invalidate the approval.

    To find important product identification, look on the printed product label on the back face of the device as shown in Figure 2‑3 below.

    Figure 2 3 - DynaFlex II Go Device Label Location

    The product label includes the following elements of device identification information, indicated by the numbered callouts in Figure 2‑4 and Figure 2‑5.

    1. Product Name

    2. PCI Hardware Identifier (“HW”)

    Figure 2 4 - DynaFlex II Go Device Label

    Figure 2 5 DynaFlex II Go with Bluetooth LE Device Label

    The label also contains other supporting information about the device.

    All DynaFlex II Go product family hardware configurations are listed in Table 2‑1 below. The device utilizes two interface types, USB and Bluetooth LE. Use of any interface other than USB or Bluetooth LE will invalidate PCI approval.

    The most recent firmware versions for DynaFlex II Go products are 1000009446-AB0-PCI for the secure bootloader (Boot1 FW), 1000009421-AC0-PCI and 1000009714-AC0-PCI for the core firmware (Main FW), and 1000009327-AB0-PCI for the Bluetooth LE Firmware Version. The X in firmware versions indicates minor non-security related changes. The secure bootloader firmware version also covers the initial bootloader (Boot0) permanently programmed into the device. Any changes to either Boot0 or Boot1 will result in a change to the Boot1 FW version that is visible to the user, reported by the device, and listed on the PCI Approved Devices website.

    All device identification information, including firmware versions and PCI Hardware ID, is accessible by connecting DynaFlex II Go to a host device via USB or Bluetooth LE, using the latest software provided by MagTek, as seen in Figure 2‑6 - Device Information Screen.

    The host user can also can retrieve device information at any time using Command 0xD101 Get Property as described in DynaFlex II Go Programmer’s Manual (COMMANDS).

    DynaFlex II Go, PCI, BLACK, BLUETOOTH LE

    42PCI50B0BB0

    DynaFlex II Go, PCI, BCR, BLACK, BLUETOOTH LE

    42PCI30U0BC0

    DynaFlex II Go, PCI, BLACK

    42PCI50U0BC0

    DynaFlex II Go, PCI, BCR, BLACK

    42PCI30B0BC0

    DynaFlex II Go, PCI, BLACK, BLUETOOTH LE

    42PCI50B0BC0

    DynaFlex II Go, PCI, BCR, BLACK, BLUETOOTH LE

    42PCI30U0BD0

    DynaFlex II Go, PCI, BLACK

    42PCI50U0BD0

    DynaFlex II Go, PCI, BCR, BLACK

    42PCI30B0BD0

    DynaFlex II Go, PCI, BLACK, BLUETOOTH LE

    42PCI50B0BD0

    DynaFlex II Go, PCI, BCR, BLACK, BLUETOOTH LE

    9

    10

    11

    12

    PCI Hardware ID Number

    4

    2

    P

    C

    I

    3

    0

    U

    0

    B

    PCI Hardware ID Number

    4

    2

    P

    C

    I

    5

    0

    U

    0

    B

    PCI Hardware ID Number

    4

    2

    P

    C

    I

    3

    0

    B

    0

    B

    PCI Hardware ID Number

    4

    2

    P

    C

    I

    5

    0

    B

    0

    B

    PCI Hardware ID Number

    4

    2

    P

    C

    I

    3

    0

    U

    0

    B

    PCI Hardware ID Number

    4

    2

    P

    C

    I

    5

    0

    U

    0

    B

    PCI Hardware ID Number

    4

    2

    P

    C

    I

    3

    0

    B

    0

    B

    PCI Hardware ID Number

    4

    2

    P

    C

    I

    5

    0

    B

    0

    B

    PCI Hardware ID Number

    4

    2

    P

    C

    I

    3

    0

    U

    0

    B

    PCI Hardware ID Number

    4

    2

    P

    C

    I

    5

    0

    U

    0

    B

    PCI Hardware ID Number

    4

    2

    P

    C

    I

    3

    0

    B

    0

    B

    PCI Hardware ID Number

    4

    2

    P

    C

    I

    5

    0

    B

    0

    B

    PCI = PCI Hardware

    6

    Front options

    3 = Standard

    5 = includes Barcode Reader

    7

    Option RFU (Reserved for Future Use)

    RFU 0 = as Certified

    8

    Interface Options

    U = USB only

    B = USB + Bluetooth LE

    9

    Option RFU (Reserved for Future Use)

    RFU 0 = as Certified

    10

    Cover Color:

    B = Black

    11

    Version

    B and C and D = as Certified

    12

    minor fixes not adding functionality or related to security (e.g., change component value for antenna matching):

    0 = as certified

    8

    9

    10

    11

    12

    13

    14

    15

    16

    17

    18

    1

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    9

    4

    2

    1

    1

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    9

    4

    1

    1

    1

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    9

    4

    2

    1

    1

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    9

    7

    1

    4

    1

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    9

    7

    1

    4

    1

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    9

    4

    2

    1

    1000009421 - AA, AB, and AC = Certified Version

    1000009714 - AB and AC = Certified Version

    14

    Minor revisions, bug fixes

    16-18

    PCI = PCI version of firmware

    9

    10

    11

    12

    13

    14

    15

    16

    17

    18

    1

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    9

    4

    4

    6

    -

    AA = Certified Version

    14

    Minor revisions, bug fixes

    16-18

    PCI = PCI version of firmware

    9

    10

    11

    12

    13

    14

    15

    16

    17

    18

    1

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    9

    3

    2

    7

    -

    AA = Certified Version

    14

    Minor revisions, bug fixes

    16-18

    PCI = PCI version of firmware

    PCI ID Tag

    Configuration Description

    42PCI30U0BB0

    DynaFlex II Go, PCI, BLACK

    42PCI50U0BB0

    DynaFlex II Go, PCI, BCR, BLACK

    PCI Hardware ID Number

    1

    2

    3

    4

    5

    6

    7

    Fixed Position

    Variable “X” Position

    Description of Fixed or Variable “X” in the Selection Position

    1-2

    42 = DynaFlex II Go

    3-5

    Firmware Number

    1

    2

    3

    4

    5

    6

    Fixed Position

    Variable “x”

    Position

    Description of Fixed or Variable “x” in the Selected Position

    1-10

    1000009421, 1000009714 = DynaFlex II Go Main firmware part number

    12-13

    Firmware Number

    1

    2

    3

    4

    5

    6

    7

    Fixed Position

    Variable

    “x” Position

    Description of Fixed or Variable “x” in the Selected Position

    1-10

    1000009446 = DynaFlex II Go Boot firmware part number

    12-13

    Firmware Number

    1

    2

    3

    4

    5

    6

    7

    Fixed Position

    Variable

    “x” Position

    Description of Fixed or Variable “x” in the Selected Position

    1-10

    1000009327 = DynaFlex II Go Bluetooth LE firmware part number

    12-13

    Identification

    Hardware Identification

    PCI Hardware Identifier

    Hardware Versions with Description of Associated Variables

    Firmware Identification

    Main Firmware Version and Associated Variables

    Main FW

    Boot Firmware Version and Associated Variables

    Boot FW

    Bluetooth LE Firmware Version and Associated Variables

    Bluetooth LE FW

    42PCI30B0BB0

    8

    7

    8

    8

    B

    0

    B

    0

    B

    0

    B

    0

    C

    0

    C

    0

    C

    0

    C

    0

    D

    0

    D

    0

    D

    0

    D

    0

    -

    A

    A

    X

    -

    P

    C

    I

    -

    A

    B

    X

    -

    P

    C

    I

    -

    A

    C

    X

    -

    P

    C

    I

    -

    A

    B

    X

    -

    P

    C

    I

    -

    A

    C

    X

    -

    P

    C

    I

    -

    A

    C

    x

    -

    P

    C

    I

    A

    A

    x

    -

    P

    C

    I

    A

    A

    x

    -

    P

    C

    I

    Bluetooth® Low Energy (LE) LED Behavior

    Bluetooth® Low Energy (LE) Status LED 2 and LED 3

    LED 2 is designated for indicating Bluetooth® connection status, not USB connection status.

    • When LED 2 is off, it indicates that the device is not currently connected via Bluetooth®. In most cases, this implies that the device has a Bluetooth® signal that is not connected, unless this has been intentionally disabled through configuration.

    • When LED 2 is on, it indicates that the device is currently connected via Bluetooth®. LED 3 is designated for indicating readiness for Bluetooth® message exchange.

    • When LED 3 is off, it indicates that the Bluetooth® connection is not yet ready. This could be due to the absence of a secure connection or the non-activation of device-to-host characteristic notifications.

    • When LED 3 is on, it indicates that the Bluetooth® connection is ready, signaling the establishment of a secure connection and the activation of device-to-host characteristic notifications.

    Press and hold the Power Button for two seconds: initially, LED 4 will light up, followed by all four LEDs illuminating for one second. This is followed by LEDs 1 and 2 remaining lit for 2 seconds, after which only LED 1 will be active.

    Figure - Power On in Battery Operating Mode

    Figure - LED Behavior for Bluetooth® Low Energy (LE) Ready State

    If the host is within the Bluetooth® Low Energy (LE) connection range, all three LEDs (LED 1, 2, 3) will be illuminated, as described in Figure 7-8 - LED Behavior for Bluetooth® Low Energy (LE) Ready State.

    DynaFlex II Go is capable of being powered off while in Battery Operating Mode only. To initiate the power-off sequence, press and hold the Power Button for two beeps then release. It's important to note that DynaFlex II Go cannot be powered off while connected via USB. If a two-beep sequence is initiated while connected to USB the device will reboot.

    Figure - Power Off Device in Battery Operating Mode

    DynaFlex II Go must first be paired with the host device before a secure Bluetooth® connection can be established. Follow the steps below to activate Bluetooth® pairing mode:

    • Press and Hold the Power Button for 4 beeps

    • Release the Power Button

    • LED 1 will remain steadily illuminated while LED 4 will begin to blink. When LED 4 is blinking it indicates the device is waiting to pair with the host. It will continue to blink for 3 minutes, waiting to pair with the host.

    Figure - Activate BLE Pairing Mode

    • When the host is pairing with DynaFlex II GO, LED 4 will remain off and LED 2 will power on, indicating the pair is processing.

    Figure - Bluetooth® LE Pair Processing

    • The device will return to Power On status if pairing Succeeds or Fails. LED 2 will power off and LED 1 will remain powered on.

    Figure - Pairing Successful/Failed

    When the device establishes a connection to the host via BLE and is prepared for secure communication, all three LEDs (LED 1, 2, 3) will illuminate steadily.

    Figure - BLE Connected to Host

    When the device is disconnected from the host Bluetooth® Low Energy (LE) connection, LED 3 will power off first and after 4 seconds, LED 2 will power off, LED 1 will remain powered on as the device returns to Ready State.

    Figure 7-14 - Bluetooth® LE Disconnect LED Sequence

    When in Bluetooth® LE Sleep Mode, DynaFlex II Go will conserve battery life by limiting power to non-essential hardware features and entering low power mode. When in Sleep Mode, the device will appear to be powered off, with no LEDs illuminated, see Figure 7-15 – Bluetooth® (LE) Sleep Mode. For information on how to disable this feature, see D998200597 DynaFlex II Go Programmer’s Manual (COMMANDS).

    Figure – Bluetooth® (LE) Sleep Mode

    Power On DynaFlex II Go in Battery Operating Mode

    Power Off DynaFlex II Go in Battery Operating Mode

    DynaFlex II Go Bluetooth® Low Energy (LE) Host Pairing

    DynaFlex II Go Bluetooth® Low Energy (LE) Host Connected

    DynaFlex II Go Bluetooth® Low Energy (LE) Host Disconnect

    DynaFlex II Go Bluetooth® Low Energy (LE) Sleep Mode

    Submit feedback
    Submit feedback
    Submit feedback
    Submit feedback
    Submit feedback
    Submit feedback

    Acronyms

    Acronym

    Definition

    AES

    Advanced Encryption Standard

    BCR

    Barcode Reader

    CTLS

    Contactless

    DES

    Data Encryption Standard

    DUKPT

    Derived Unique Key Per Transaction

    ECC

    Elliptic-Curve Cryptography

    ICCR

    Integrated Circuit Card Reader

    MAC

    In cryptography: Message Authentication Code

    In networking: Media Access Control [address]

    MSR

    Magnetic Stripe Reader

    NFC

    Near Field Communication

    POI

    Point Of Interaction

    S/N

    Serial Number

    SCRA

    Secure Card Reader Authenticator

    SHA

    Secure Hash Algorithm

    SRED

    Secure Reading and Exchange of Data

    TDEA

    Triple Data Encryption Algorithm

    USB

    Universal Serial Bus

    USB HID

    USB Human Interface Device

    Quick Installation Guide

    Overview

    DynaFlex II Go and DynaFlex II Go BCR deliver the next generation of mobile payment solutions, both models are PCI PTS 6.x. This document provides an abbreviated version of the Installation and Operation Manual, PN D998200595 hosted on www.magtek.com. These secure card reader authenticator devices accept magnetic stripe cards; EMV chip cards (contact and contactless); NFC enabled mobile wallets including Apple® Pay, Samsung™ Pay, Google Pay™, with support for Google Smart Tap and Apple VAS protocols, and MIFARE® Classic,

    MIFARE® DESFire, and NTag. DynaFlex II Go BCR additionally has an integrated barcode reader. Ideal for cafés, restaurants, boutiques, airlines, retail banks, and other developers looking to build a secure payment solution that accepts swipe, tap, and dip technology.

    Major Components

    DynaFlex II Go Major Components

    Top Face

    Environmental Notice

    DynaFlex II Go products are designed to provide flexible mounting options. The device can be mounted to the host via an external clip or the embedded lanyard. When designing an enclosure or mounting bracket, ensure there is adequate clearance for cardholders to tap, swipe, dip, and

    for users to present a bar code. Proximity to metal can reduce the device’s reading range. DynaFlex II Go offers an optional OtterBox uniVERSE clip adapter and a countertop stand.

    DynaFlex II Go is available with USB-C or USB-C and Bluetooth LE connection. Check you model number for connection configuration.

    For best results, use the cable that is included with the device. Connect the cable to the device. Connect the other end to the HOST USB port. Device will automatically power on. Windows will start an installation of the driver on initial connection. Windows will report DEVICE IS READY and device

    shows in Windows Device Manager under HUMAN INTERFACE DEVICES as two devices HID-COMPLIANT VENDOR-DEFINED (VID 0801, PID 2024) and USB INPUT DEVICES.

    See D998200386 MagTek Universal SDK

    Disconnect any active connections to the device. Install Android HOST software. Press and hold the POWER BUTTON for 4 beeps until LED 4 starts flashing indicating Bluetooth LE pairing is in process. LED flashes once per second for up to 3 minutes. On the Android HOST, launch SETTINGS >BLUETOOTH> SEARCH FOR DEVICES > locate

    the 7-digit serial number on the device label (DF II GO_xxxxxxx). Select device. When HOST shows BLUETOOTH PAIRING REQUEST and asks for configuration key, enter [000000]. The device appears in PAIRED DEVICES. Change the default passkey.

    To UNPAIR, locate the device in BLUETOOTH configuration page on HOST, press the settings (gear) icon, press FORGET.

    Ensure HOST Bluetooth LE is turned on and working. Disconnect any other connections to the device. On the HOST, install and configure the software. Ensure HOST software is configured to look for the device. The device transmits in GATT format. In START on HOST type BLUETOOTH and select BLUETOOTH AND OTHER DEVICE

    SETTINGS. Locate the 7-digit serial number on device label. Press and hold the POWER BUTTON on device for 4 beeps until LED 4 starts flashing indicating Bluetooth pairing is in process. LED flashes once per second for up to 3 minutes. Press the ADD BLUETOOTH OR OTHER DEVICE button and launch ADD A DEVICE window. Under CHOOSE THE KIND OF DEVICE YOU WANT TO ADD select BLUETOOTH.

    Locate the device called DF II GO-xxxxxxx. Enter configured passkey (000000) press the CONNECT button. After a short period CONNECTED appears. Press DONE. Change the default passkey.

    To UNPAIR, select the device in BLUETOOTH AND OTHER DEVICE SETTINGS window and press the REMOVE DEVICE button.

    DynaFlex II Go receives power from the USB-C port. The battery must be periodically recharged by connecting the device to a USB port or stand-alone USB charger. The device requires a USB power supply that

    can provide at least 500mA @ 5V.

    • Powered Off Mode is the shipping and storage mode of the device. No external power is applied to the device through the USB cable or from the internal rechargeable battery.

    • Active Mode is the device’s normal “awake” state when it is in use. In this mode, the device LED indicators are powered on, and the device is ready to receive commands from the host.

    • To set the device from Active mode to Powered Off mode: remove power, and press and hold the power button for two beeps.

    DynaFlex II Go has 4 LEDs that provide responses to the user for Power, Connection, Device Status, and Card Status. The Installation and Operation Manual has a more complete list of light signals.

    The device does not have an on-screen configuration interface. However, it does have settings the HOST can change using commands.

    Operator presses the Start transaction button on the HOST device. LED 1 and 2 will remain on. When a card is swiped, all four LEDs will turn on in sequence (1, 2, 3 then 4), followed by a long beep, indicating a successful transaction. Swipe the card with the magnetic stripe facing away from the face of the device. After a successful transaction, the device will return to the ready state.

    Locate the insertion slot on the face of the device. Orient the chip card so the chip faces the face of the device. Insert the chip card into the slot, then push gently on the card until it stops. The operator presses the Start transaction button on the HOST device.

    LED 1 and 2 will remain on. When a card is inserted, LEDs 1, 2 and 4 will turn on in sequence, followed by a long beep, indicating a successful transaction.

    Hold QR Code or barcode approximately 6 inches away from barcode reader. The operator presses the Start button on the HOST device. LED 1,2, and the BCR status light will be illuminated see. When a barcode is detected, only LED 1 will remain illuminated, the BCR status LED will be off, and a long beep will sound.

    The operator presses the Start transaction button on the host device. LED 1 will remain on. When a card is presented within range of the contactless reader, LEDs 1,2,3, and 4 will turn on in sequence, followed by a long beep, indicating a successful transaction. Tap the card or electronic payment device on the contactless landing zone, indicated by the EMVCo Contactless Indicator on the device’s face. The card or device’s antenna* must be centered over the contactless landing zone. Remove the card or electronic payment device from the contactless landing zone.

    Users can take advantage of the OtterBox® uniVERSE® adaptor for easy sliding and connection to a wide range of mobile devices, including phones and tablets

    FCC INFORMATION

    This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

    Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

    Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

    Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

    Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

    CAUTION

    Changes or modifications not expressly approved by MagTek could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.

    CANADIAN DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

    This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.

    Le présent appareil numérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la classe B prescrites dans le Réglement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le ministère des Communications du Canada.

    This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

    Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conformé à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

    INDUSTRY CANADA (IC) RSS

    This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

    Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

    CUR/UR

    This product is recognized per Underwriter Laboratories and Canadian Underwriter Laboratories 1950.

    CE STANDARDS

    Testing for compliance with CE requirements was performed by an independent laboratory. The unit under test was found compliant with standards established for Class B devices.

    EU STATEMENT

    Hereby, MagTek Inc. declares that the radio equipment types Wideband Transmission System (802.11 wireless and Bluetooth® Low Energy), and Non-Specific Short Range Device (contactless) are in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declarations of conformity is available at the following Internet addresses:

    UL/CSA

    This product is recognized per UL 60950 1, 2nd Edition, 2011 12 19 (Information Technology Equipment - Safety - Part 1: General Requirements), CSA C22.2 No. 60950 1 07, 2nd Edition, 2011 12 (Information Technology Equipment - Safety - Part 1: General Requirements).

    ROHS STATEMENT

    When ordered as RoHS compliant, this product meets the Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EEE) Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive (EU) 2015/863 amending Annex II to Directive 2011/65/EU. The marking is clearly recognizable, either as written words like “Pb-free,” “lead-free,” or as another clear symbol ( Pb ).

    PCI STATEMENT

    PCI Security Standards Council, LLC (“PCI SSC”) has approved this PIN Transaction Security Device to be in compliance with PCI SSC’s PIN Security Requirements.

    When granted, PCI SSC approval is provided by PCI SSC to ensure certain security and operational characteristics important to the achievement of PCI SSC’s goals, but PCI SSC approval does not under any circumstances include any endorsement or warranty regarding the functionality, quality or performance of any particular product or service. PCI SSC does not warrant any products or services provided by third parties. PCI SSC approval does not under any circumstances include or imply any product warranties from PCI SSC, including, without limitation, any implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for purpose, or non-infringement, all of which are expressly disclaimed by PCI SSC. All rights and remedies regarding products and services which have received PCI SSC approval shall be provided by the party providing such products or services, and not by PCI SSC.

    UKCA STATEMENT

    Hereby, MagTek Inc. declares that the radio equipment types Wideband Transmission System (Wireless LAN and Bluetooth Low Energy), and Non-Specific Short Range Device (contactless) are in compliance with Radio Equipment Regulations 2017 Directive S.I.2017:1206. The full text of the UKCA declarations of conformity is available at the following Internet addresses:

    Storage temperature

    -4°F to 113°F (-20°C to 45°C)

    Operating temperature

    32°F to 95°F (0°C to 35°C)

    Mounting / Stability

    Connection

    How to Connect to a Host Computer via USB-C

    How to Connect to iOS Host via Bluetooth® LE

    How to Connect to Android Host via Bluetooth LE

    How to Connect to Windows 11 Host via Bluetooth LE

    Power

    LEDs

    Commands

    Accepting Payments

    SWIPE: How to Swipe Magnetic Stripe Cards

    DIP: How to Insert EMV Contact Chip Cards

    SCAN: How to Read with Barcode Reader

    TAP: How to Tap Contactless Cards / Devices

    *NOTE ON ELECTRONIC DEVICES: If the cardholder is using an electronic payment device, such as a smartphone, ensure the payment device has NFC turned ON and has a payment app configured to process transactions. Because each smartphone model may have its NFC antenna placed differently, the ideal tap position may vary by make and model. For example, Samsung users may need to center the phone on the contactless landing zone, while Apple users may need to tap the top of the phone on the contactless landing zone.

    Accessories

    OtterBox Adapater

    COMPLIANCE

    https://www.magtek.com/content/documentationfiles/d998200650.pdf
    https://www.magtek.com/content/documentationfiles/d998200651.pdf

    DynaFlex II Go Video

    LED Behavior: Errors, Timeouts, and Canceled Transactions

    Table - LED Behavior for Errors, Timeouts, and Canceled Transactions, contains LED behavior related to errors, timeouts, and canceled transactions. If the device is exhibiting LED behavior not previously mentioned, it may be contained in this section.

    Table - LED and BCR Indicator Light ON/OFF State

    LED

    BCR Indicator Light

    Table - LED Behavior for Errors, Timeouts, and Canceled Transactions

    Device Model

    Error LED Behavior

    Timeout LED Behavior

    Cancel LED Behavior

    DynaFlex II Go BCR Connected via USB

    LED 1,2 ON – BCR ON

    > LED1,2 ON, BCR

    OFF + Double Beeps

    > Ready

    LED1,2,3 OFF – LED 4

    BCR ON + Double Beeps

    LED 1,2 ON – BCR ON

    > LED1,2 ON – BCR

    OFF + Double Beeps

    > Ready

    DynaFlex II Go BCR

    Connected via Bluetooth® LE

    Device Model

    Error LED Behavior

    Timeout LED Behavior

    Cancel LED Behavior

    DynaFlex II Go MSR

    Connected via Bluetooth® LE

    LED 1,2 ON

    > LED1,2,3 OFF – LED

    4 ON + Double beeps

    LED1,2,3 OFF – LED 4

    ON + Double beeps

    LED 1,2 ON

    > LED1,2 ON + Double Beeps

    > Ready

    Device Model

    Error LED Behavior

    Timeout LED Behavior

    Cancel LED Behavior

    DynaFlex II Go EMV Contactless

    Connected via Bluetooth® LE

    LED 1 ON

    > LED1,2,3 OFF – LED

    4 ON + Double Beeps

    LED 1,2,3 OFF – LED4

    ON + Double Beeps

    LED 1 ON

    > LED1 ON + Double Beeps

    > Ready

    LED 1,2 ON – BCR ON

    > LED1,2 ON, BCR

    OFF + Double Beeps

    > Ready

    LED1,2,3 OFF – LED 4

    BCR ON + Double Beeps

    LED 1,2 ON - BCR ON

    > LED1,2 ON - BCR

    OFF + Double Beeps

    > Ready

    DynaFlex II Go MSR Connected via USB

    LED 1,2 ON

    > LED1,2,3 OFF – LED

    4 ON + Double beeps

    LED1,2,3 OFF – LED4

    ON + Double beeps

    LED 1,2 ON

    > LED1,2 ON + Double Beeps

    > Ready

    DynaFlex II Go EMV Contact

    Connected via USB

    LED 1,2 ON

    > LED1,2,3 OFF – LED

    4 ON + Double beeps

    LED 1,2,3 OFF – LED 4

    ON + Double Beeps

    LED 1 ON

    > LED1 ON + Double Beeps

    > Ready

    DynaFlex II Go EMV Contact

    Connected via Bluetooth® LE

    LED 1,2 ON

    > LED1,2,3 OFF – LED

    4 ON + Double Beeps

    LED 1,2,3 OFF – LED 4

    ON + Double Beeps

    LED 1,2 ON

    > LED1,2 ON + Double Beeps

    > Ready

    DynaFlex II Go EMV Contactless

    Connected via USB

    LED 1 ON

    > LED1,2,3 OFF – LED

    4 ON + Double beeps

    LED 1,2,3 OFF – LED4

    ON + Double beeps

    LED 1 ON

    > LED1 ON + Double Beeps

    > Ready

    Package Inspection Documentation

    iDynamo 5 (Gen III) is a compact secure card reader authenticator (SCRA) that reads magnetic stripe cards that conform to ISO standards. iDynamo models are made for iOS, Android, and Windows devices equipped with a USB-C interface. When a cardholder swipes a card, the device encrypts card data before they leave the encapsulated magnetic stripe reader head using the Triple Data Encryption Algorithm (TDEA, also known as Triple DES) and DUKPT key management.

    Overall Form Factor

    The basic form factor of the package is a folded white cardboard box with a cardboard insert where the device is nestled into the box. There are no rips or added materials on the package other than product and Lot labels. The package only has one color ink printed on the package: black. The box is made with corrugated white cardboard.

    Back of Package

    Industry certification logos showing compliance are printed on the back of the package as shown.

    Manufacturer

    Manufacturer address is shown.

    Top of Package

    The top of the package is printed as shown, with MFi logo, QR Code for Package inspection document and Quick Installation Guide, URL Links and product name and description.

    Left Side of Package

    On the left side of the package is printed with the contents and the product label is adhered.

    Right Side of Package

    The right side of the package lists the storage guidelines and CAUTION content regarding temperature and humidity.

    Front of Package

    The front of the package lists the product name, product category, and is secured with Security Tape.

    Security Tape

    Security tape wraps onto the bottom of the package from the front flap of the package.

    Adhered

    Here security tape is applied and secured. Wrapping front to bottom of package.

    Tape - Removed Tape

    Tape is removed VOID and OPENED appear on tape.

    Package - Removed Tape

    Tape is removed VOID and OPENED show as the inverse ink on the package.

    Bottom

    Security Tape

    The Security Tape wraps from the front flap to the bottom of the package.

    Make certain there are no signs of tampering.

    Lot Label

    The Lot label is adhered on the bottom of the box. Make certain there are no false labels added or signs of tampering.

    Inside

    Dynamo 5 (Gen III) products are nestled inside the package for transit. The package includes the device, cable(s), device inspection document, and quick installation guide.

    To check for PCI Validation check the Hardware and Firmware ID. Hardware ID is printed on the label. The Firmware ID is accessible via the device.

    Go to the PCI compliance web page and search for MagTek, and find the product name. Compare the Hardware ID and Firmware ID:

    As part of your inspection, include the following for your inspection audit:

    • Be certain to have a list of the devices and include the details listed on the product label.

    • It may be helpful to take photos of the front, back, and sides of each device.

    Be certain to check device part numbers, serial numbers, and IDs and check physical connections. Use the chart below as a checklist to inspect the device for signs of tampering.

    Front

    Check form factor

    Look for signs of tamper

    Check printing and no added labels

    Left, Right, and Back Sides

    Check form factor

    Look for signs of tamper

    Check printing and no added labels

    Check product label

    Front Flap

    Check Security Tape

    Look for signs of tamper

    Check printing and no added labels

    Check form factor

    Bottom

    Check Security Tape

    Look for signs of tamper

    Check printing

    Check form factor

    Check lot Label

    Are there signs of tampering?

    YES

    NO

    Package Inspection

    NOTICE: Follow RMA procedures. User should report all signs of tampering as per standard protocol.

    Need Help?

    For additional support, please contact MagTek Support:

    Technical Support:

    • 📧 Email: support@magtek.com

    • 📞 Phone: 1-562-546-6800 (US)

    • 🕐 Hours: Monday-Friday, 5:30 AM - 5:00 PM PST

    Online Resources:

    • 🌐 Support Portal: developer.magtek.com

    Documentation Feedback:

    Help us improve this documentation!

    https://www.pcisecuritystandards.org/assessors_and_solutions/pin_transaction_devices

    Form Factor - check overall form factor

    feedback@magtek.com